U.S. patent application number 14/840723 was filed with the patent office on 2016-04-07 for an electro-optic element.
The applicant listed for this patent is Gentex Corporation. Invention is credited to John S. Anderson, Jeffrey T. Bruizeman, Henry A. Luten, George A. Neuman.
Application Number | 20160097959 14/840723 |
Document ID | / |
Family ID | 48694597 |
Filed Date | 2016-04-07 |
United States Patent
Application |
20160097959 |
Kind Code |
A1 |
Bruizeman; Jeffrey T. ; et
al. |
April 7, 2016 |
AN ELECTRO-OPTIC ELEMENT
Abstract
A vehicular rearview assembly that has a rounded outer perimeter
edge to satisfy safety standards and contains an EC element having
a complex peripheral ring, a front surface that is fully observable
from the front of the assembly, and a user interface with switches
and sensors that activate and configure, in cooperation with
electronic circuitry of the assembly, pre-defined function(s) or
device(s) of the assembly in response to the user input applied to
the user interface. A complex peripheral ring may include multiple
bands the structures of which is adapted to provide for specified
optical characteristics of light, reflected off of the ring.
Electrical communications between the electronic circuitry, the
mirror element, and the user interface utilize connectors
configured to exert a low contact force, onto the mirror element,
limited in part by the strength of adhesive affixing the EC element
to an element of the housing of the assembly.
Inventors: |
Bruizeman; Jeffrey T.; (West
Olive, MI) ; Luten; Henry A.; (Holland, MI) ;
Anderson; John S.; (Holland, MI) ; Neuman; George
A.; (Holland, MI) |
|
Applicant: |
Name |
City |
State |
Country |
Type |
Gentex Corporation |
Zeeland |
MI |
US |
|
|
Family ID: |
48694597 |
Appl. No.: |
14/840723 |
Filed: |
August 31, 2015 |
Related U.S. Patent Documents
|
|
|
|
|
|
Application
Number |
Filing Date |
Patent Number |
|
|
13395069 |
Feb 11, 2013 |
9134585 |
|
|
PCT/US2011/043191 |
Jul 7, 2011 |
|
|
|
14840723 |
|
|
|
|
12832838 |
Jul 8, 2010 |
8169684 |
|
|
13395069 |
|
|
|
|
12832838 |
Jul 8, 2010 |
8169684 |
|
|
13395069 |
|
|
|
|
12750357 |
Mar 30, 2010 |
|
|
|
12832838 |
|
|
|
|
12154736 |
May 27, 2008 |
7719750 |
|
|
12750357 |
|
|
|
|
11477312 |
Jun 29, 2006 |
7379225 |
|
|
12154736 |
|
|
|
|
11066903 |
Feb 25, 2005 |
7372611 |
|
|
11477312 |
|
|
|
|
10260741 |
Sep 30, 2002 |
7064882 |
|
|
11066903 |
|
|
|
|
10430885 |
May 6, 2003 |
7324261 |
|
|
10260741 |
|
|
|
|
61450888 |
Mar 9, 2011 |
|
|
|
61467832 |
Mar 25, 2011 |
|
|
|
60548472 |
Feb 27, 2004 |
|
|
|
60605111 |
Aug 27, 2004 |
|
|
|
60614150 |
Sep 29, 2004 |
|
|
|
Current U.S.
Class: |
359/275 ;
427/555 |
Current CPC
Class: |
G02F 1/157 20130101;
B23K 26/402 20130101; B23K 26/362 20130101; B23K 2103/00 20180801;
G02F 1/1533 20130101; B23K 2103/50 20180801; G02F 1/161 20130101;
B60R 1/088 20130101 |
International
Class: |
G02F 1/153 20060101
G02F001/153; B23K 26/402 20060101 B23K026/402; B23K 26/362 20060101
B23K026/362; B60R 1/08 20060101 B60R001/08; G02F 1/161 20060101
G02F001/161 |
Claims
1. An electro-optic element comprising: a first substrate having
first and second surfaces; a second substrate having third and
fourth surfaces, the second and third surfaces disposed in a
parallel and spaced-apart relationships such to form a gap
therebetween; a sealing material circumferentially disposed along a
perimeter of the third surface to sealingly affix the second and
third surfaces together to form a chamber therebetween; and an
electro-optic medium in the chamber; wherein at least one of the
second and third surfaces carries a transparent conducting oxide
(TCO); wherein the at least one of the second and third surfaces
carried a metal-containing layer; wherein the metal-containing
layer is substantially absent at at least a portion of a surface of
the TCO to define an opening and the TCO layer is present in
substantially all of the opening; and wherein the metal-containing
layer has a sharp or abruptly terminated edge.
2. The electro-optic element according to claim 1, wherein a
distance of a transition of the sharp or abruptly terminated edge
from about 90% of the maximum thickness of the metal-containing
layer to about 10% of the maximum thickness of the metal containing
layer is less than 1 mm.
3. The electro-optic element according to claim 1, wherein the
metal-containing layer has a rate of change of a thickness per
millimeter of distance, at the sharp or abruptly terminated edge,
that is about four times a value of the maximum thickness of the
metal-containing layer or less.
4. The electro-optic element according to claim 1, wherein the
metal-containing layer has a rate of change of a thickness per
millimeter of distance, at the sharp or abruptly terminated edge,
that is about two orders of magnitude larger than a value of the
maximum thickness of the metal-containing layer.
5. The electro-optic element according to claim 1, devoid of color
shift in the metal-containing layer near the sharp or abruptly
terminated edge at the opening.
6. The electro-optic element according to claim 1, wherein the
electro-optic element is one of an electrochromic mirror and an
electrochromic window.
7. The electro-optic element according to claim 1, wherein the
sharp or abruptly terminated edge has a laser finished
characteristic.
8. The electro-optic element according to claim 7, wherein the
sharp or abruptly terminated edge has a scalloped
characteristic.
9. The electro-optic element according to claim 7, wherein the
metal-containing layer has been removed with laser ablation to form
the opening.
10. The electro-optic element according to claim 9, wherein the TCO
remain relatively undamaged.
11. The electro-optic element according to claim 9, wherein the
metal-containing layer has been removed with light from a laser
source directed at the metal-containing layer through a substrate
containing the metal-containing layer.
12. The electro-optic element according to claim 7, wherein a haze
value characterizing a substrate carrying the metal-containing
layer defining the opening and measured in the opening is less than
about 0.5%.
13. The electro-optic element according to claim 7, wherein a
metallic residue in an area of the opening covers less than about
2% of the area of a surface of the opening.
14. An electro optic element according to claim 1, wherein the
metal-containing layer is under the TCO.
15. An electro-optic element comprising: a first substrate having
first and second surfaces; a second substrate having third and
fourth surfaces, the second and third surfaces disposed in a
parallel and spaced-apart relationships such to form a gap
therebetween; a sealing material circumferentially disposed along a
perimeter of the third surface to sealingly affix the second and
third surfaces together to form a chamber therebetween; and an
electro-optic medium in the chamber; wherein at least one of the
second and third surfaces carries a transparent conducting oxide
(TCO); wherein the at least one of the second and third surfaces
carried a metal-containing layer; wherein the metal-containing
layer is substantially absent at at least a portion of a surface of
the TCO to define an opening and the TCO layer is present in
substantially all of the opening; and wherein the TCO remains
relatively undamaged.
16. The electro-optic element according to claim 15, devoid of
color shift in the metal-containing layer near the sharp or
abruptly terminated edge at the opening.
17. The electro-optic element according to claim 15, wherein the
electro-optic element is one of an electrochromic mirror and an
electrochromic window.
18. The electro-optic element according to claim 15, wherein the
metal-containing layer has been removed with laser ablation to form
the opening.
19. The electro-optic element according to claim 15, wherein the
metal-containing layer has been removed with light from a laser
source directed at the metal-containing layer through a substrate
containing the metal-containing layer.
20. The electro-optic element according to claim 15, wherein a haze
value characterizing a substrate carrying the metal-containing
layer defining the opening and measured in the opening is less than
about 0.5%.
21. The electro-optic element according to claim 15, wherein a
metallic residue in an area of the opening covers less than about
2% of the area of a surface of the opening.
22. An electro optic element according to claim 15, wherein the
metal-containing layer is under the TCO.
23. A method for fabrication of an electro optic element, the
method comprising: depositing a first metal-containing layer onto a
first transparent substrate; laser ablating the first
metal-containing layer from a portion of an area of the first
transparent substrate to create an opening in the metal-containing
layer in said portion; depositing a transparent conductive oxide
(TCO) layer onto the first substrate to cover a surface of the
transparent substrate corresponding to said portion; wherein the
opening in the metal-containing layer is comprises at least one of:
a sharp or abruptly terminated edge; a haze value, of a substrate
carrying the metal-containing layer defining the opening and
measured in the opening, of less than 0.5%; an absorption value, of
a substrate carrying the metal-containing layer defining the
opening and measured in the opening, of less than 10%; and a
metallic residue that covers less than 2% of an area of a surface
of the opening.
24. A method for fabrication of an electro optic element, the
method comprising: depositing a first transparent conductive oxide
(TCO) layer onto a transparent substrate; depositing a
metal-containing layer onto the TCO layer; and laser ablating a
portion of an area of the transparent substrate covered by the
metal-containing layer to create an opening in the metal-containing
layer; wherein the opening in the metal-containing layer is
characterized by at least one of: a sharp or abruptly terminated
edge; a haze value, of a substrate carrying the metal-containing
layer defining the opening and measured in the opening, of less
than 0.5%; an absorption value, of a substrate carrying the
metal-containing layer defining the opening and measured in the
opening, of less than 10%; and a metallic residue that covers less
than 2% of an area of a surface of the opening.
Description
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application is a continuation of and claims priority to
U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/395,069, filed on Feb. 11,
2013, and titled "Automotive Rearview Mirror With Capacitive
Switches," which is a national stage entry of PCT/US2011/043191
filed Jul. 7, 2011, and titled "Automotive Rearview Mirror With
Capacitive Switches," and is a continuation of U.S. patent
application Ser. No. 12/832,838, filed on Jul. 8, 2010, and titled
"Vehicular Rearview Mirror Elements and Assemblies Incorporating
These Elements," now issued as U.S. Pat. No. 8,169,684.
PCT/USUS2011/043191 also claims the benefit of and priority under
35 U.S.C. .sctn.119(e) to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.
61/450,888, filed on Mar. 9, 2011, and titled "Automotive Rearview
Mirror With Capacitive Switches," and U.S. Provisional Patent
Application No. 61/467,832, filed on Mar. 25, 2011, and titled
"Automotive Rearview Mirror with Capacitive Switches." U.S. patent
application Ser. No. 13/395,069 is also a continuation-in-part of
U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/832,838, filed on Jul. 8, 2010,
and titled "Vehicular Rearview Mirror Elements and Assemblies
Incorporating These Elements," now issued as U.S. Pat. No.
8,169,684, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent
application Ser. No. 12/750,357, filed on Mar. 30, 2010, now
abandoned, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser.
No. 12/154,736, filed on May 27, 2008, and now issued as U.S. Pat.
No. 7,719,750, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application
Ser. No. 11/477,312, filed on Jun. 29, 2006, and now issued as U.S.
Pat. No. 7,379,225, which is a continuation of U.S. patent
application Ser. No. 11/066,903, filed on Feb. 25, 2005, and now
issued as U.S. Pat. No. 7,372,611, which is a continuation-in-part
of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/260,741, filed Sep. 30,
2002, and now issued as U.S. Pat. No. 7,064,882, and is a
continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No.
10/430,885, filed on May 6, 2003, and now issued as U.S. Pat. No.
7,324,261, and which also claims the benefit of and priority under
35 U.S.C. .sctn.119(e) to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.
60/548,472, filed on Feb. 27, 2004, and U.S. Provisional Patent
Application No. 60/605,111, filed on Aug. 27, 2004, and U.S.
Provisional Patent Application No. 60/614,150 filed on Sep. 29,
2004. The disclosures of each of the above-identified patent
applications are hereby incorporated herein by reference in their
entirety.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0002] The present invention generally relates to electro-optic
(EO) devices and apparatus incorporating such devices. In
particular, the invention relates to electro-optic devices used in
architectural windows or vehicular rearview mirror elements.
[0003] Electro-optic rearview mirror elements are becoming more
common in vehicular applications with regard to both inside and
outside rearview mirrors and mirror assemblies, whether on the
driver's or the passenger's side. Such electro-optic rearview
mirrors are automatically controlled to vary the reflectivity of
the mirror in response to rearward and forward aimed light sensors
so as to reduce the glare of headlamps in the image reflected to
the driver's eyes. Typical electro-optic elements, when
incorporated in vehicular rearview mirror assemblies, will have an
effective field of view (as defined by relevant laws, codes and
specifications) that is less than the area defined by the perimeter
of the element itself. Often, the effective field of view of the
element is limited, at least in part, by the construction of the
element itself and/or an associated bezel.
[0004] Typically, a vehicular rearview assembly (for example, an
autodimming assembly such as, generally, EO mirror assembly and, in
particular, an electrochromic, EC, assembly, or an assembly
including a prismatic element) includes a mirror element that is at
least partially encased in a casing or housing element, sometimes
with a bezel portion of the housing element that encompasses at
least a portion of the edge surface of the mirror element and that
mechanically cooperates (via snapping elements or other integration
mechanism) with the remaining portion of the housing element.
Typically, either the mirror element or the assembly itself is
spatially (for example, angularly) alterable by the driver (for
example, via a pivot assembly) to adjust a rearward field of view
associated with the rearview assembly.
[0005] Various attempts have been made to provide a mirror element
having an effective field of view substantially equal to the area
defined by its perimeter. As shown in FIG. 1, depicting a
cross-sectional portion of a typical rearview assembly employing an
EC element, the subassembly 100 includes an EC mirror element 110,
a bezel 112, and a carrier plate 117. The subassembly may further
include gaskets 120 and 122 that are placed on either side of the
EC element 110 to form a secondary seal around the periphery of the
element 110. The EC element 110 includes a front substantially
transparent element or substrate 130 typically formed of glass and
having a front surface 130a and a rear surface 130b. The EC element
110 further includes a rear element 140, which is spaced slightly
apart from the element 130. A seal 146 is formed between elements
130 and 140 about their periphery so as to define a sealed chamber
147 therebetween, in which an EC medium is provided. As known in
the art, elements 130 and 140 preferably have electrically
conductive layers (serving as electrodes, not shown) on the
surfaces facing the chamber such that an electrical potential may
be applied across the EC medium. These electrodes are electrically
isolated from one another and are separately coupled to a power
source (not shown) by means of corresponding bus connectors
(connector 148b is shown in a specific implementation, as an
electrically-conducting clip). To facilitate attachment of bus
connectors to corresponding electrically-conducting layers,
elements 130 and 140 are typically mutually offset so that one bus
connector may be secured along a bottom edge of one of the elements
and another bus connector may be secured to the top edge of the
other element. The bus connectors (such as the connector 148b) may
be spring clips (similar to those disclosed in commonly-assigned
U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,064,509 and 6,062,920) and are configured to
ensure that they remain physically and electrically coupled to the
electrode layers on the inward-facing surfaces of elements 130 and
140. Alternatively, the bus connectors may include an
electrically-conductive member such as a thin-film or foil that
electrically extends a corresponding conductive layer to the back
of the assembly over an edge surface of at least one of the
elements 130, 140 (as discussed, for example, in commonly-assigned
U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 12/505,458, 12/563,917). In a
specific implementation, such electrical extension may include a
portion that wraps around an edge of a corresponding substrate.
Once the EC element 110 has been manufactured and bus connectors
have been configures, then the mirror subassembly 100 may be
formed. As shown in FIG. 1, a bezel 112, the function of which is
to mechanically support the element retained by the bezel, may
include a front lip 151 extending over a portion of the front
surface 130a of the front element 130. While the width D.sub.1 of
such lip may vary, it typically extends over a sufficient portion
such as 5 mm, for example, of the front surface 130a to obscure a
person's view of the seal 146 and protect the seal 146 from
possible degradation caused by ambient UV light.
[0006] Prior to inserting the electrochromic mirror element 110 in
the bezel 115, an optional front gasket 120 may be provided behind
the front lip 151 so as to be pressed between the front surface
130a of the front element 130 and the inner surface of the front
lip 151 of bezel 112. The mirror element 110 is then placed in
bezel 112 and an optional rear gasket 122 may be provided along the
periphery of the back surface of element 140. In lieu of, or in
addition to front and/or rear gaskets 120, 122 the bezel/mirror
interface area may be filled or potted with a sealing material such
as urethane, silicone, or epoxy. A carrier plate 117, which is
typically formed of an engineering grade rigid plastic or a similar
material as used for bezel 112, is then pressed against the rear
surface of element 140 with the gasket 122 compressed therebetween.
A plurality of tabs (not shown) may be formed inside of the bezel
such that carrier plate 117 is snapped in place so as to secure
mirror element 110 within the bezel. The carrier plate 117 is
typically used to mount the mirror subassembly within an exterior
mirror housing. More specifically, a specific positioner (not
shown) may also be mounted within the mirror housing and
mechanically coupled to the carrier plate 117 for enabling remote
adjustment of the position of the mirror subassembly within the
housing. Various embodiments with reduced lip of the bezel has been
also discussed in prior art.
[0007] While the above-described structures are readily
manufacturable, various styling concerns have arisen that often
require not only elimination of a conventional bezel but addressing
various structural and functional problems generated by such
change.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0008] Embodiments of the invention provide vehicular rearview
assemblies including electrochromic (EC) elements at least a
portion of which is defined by the EC cell. Generally, the front
outer peripheral portion of an assembly defines an annulus region
having a curvature with a radius of at least 2.5 mm. The EC cell
has first and second optically transparent substrates and a seal
configured to bound a cavity of said EC cell that contains EC
medium. The first substrate of an EC cell a first surface
corresponds to a front of the EC element and a second surface has a
peripheral ring of material disposed thereon, which peripheral ring
conceals the seal from being observed from the front and from being
exposed to at least UV light incident through the first substrate.
In one embodiment, the first and second substrate cooperate such as
to establish a ledge along at least a part of a perimeter of the EC
cell. In a specific case, the second substrate has an area that is
smaller than the area of the first substrate. An embodiment of the
assembly also includes a conductive pad of a capacitive switch
disposed on the second surface adjacent to said EC cell. A
conductive pad of a capacitive switch may have an opening defined
throughout the pad. The EC element further includes an
electrically-conductive thin-film layer (such as a TCO layer)
disposed over the peripheral ring and a thin-film stack containing
a second electrically-conductive layer. In a specific embodiment,
the annulus region of the assembly is located along a perimeter of
the first surface and has an optically diffusive surface. In a
related embodiment, the seal of the EC cell includes a
non-conductive portion disposed circumferentially around a
perimeter of the EC cell such as to face the EC medium and a
conductive portion disposed outside of said non-conductive
portion.
[0009] Embodiments of the invention additionally provide an EC
element for use in a vehicular rearview assembly that includes a
first optically transparent substrate (having a first surface
corresponding to a front of the EC element, a second surfaces
opposite the first surface, and a first edge surface connecting
said first and second surfaces); a second optically transparent
substrate (having a third surface, a fourth surface, and a second
edge surface connecting said second and third surfaces); and a seal
sealably affixing the second and third surfaces to one another and
defining a perimeter of a cavity containing an EC medium between
said surfaces. Embodiments additionally include a transparent
electrode layer on the second surface of the EC element (including
a first layer of electrically-conductive material and a ring-shaped
layer of a spectral filter material disposed along a perimeter of
the cavity and adjoining the first layer of electrically-conductive
material and configured to substantially block the seal from at
least visible and UV light incident through the first surface); and
a reflective electrode layer including a second layer of
electrically-conductive material on the third surface. Furthermore,
embodiments additionally include a third layer of
electrically-conductive material carried on at least one of the
second, third, and fourth surfaces such as to have a projection,
onto the second surface, that is adjacent to either of normal
projections of the transparent electrode layer or the reflective
electrode layer onto the second surface. Optionally, the second
substrate may have an area that is smaller than an area of the
first substrate, the first substrate may be configured to
transversely extend beyond the second substrate such as to define a
ledge along at least a portion of a perimeter of the second
substrate, and the third electrically-conductive layer may be
disposed on the ledge and include a layer of the ring-shaped
spectral filter material. In a specific embodiment, the layer of
the spectral material of the third electrically-conductive layer
contains openings therethrough, and the third
electrically-conductive layer additionally includes a layer of
transparent electrically-conductive material. In particular, the
layer of transparent electrically-conductive material of the third
electrically conductive layer may include a TCO layer that is
substantially co-extensive with the spectral filter material of the
third electrically-conductive layer. In another specific
embodiment, the EC element has an annulus region having a curvature
with a radius of at least 2.5 mm and located along a perimeter of
the first surface. Optionally, the annulus region has an optically
diffusive surface.
[0010] Any embodiment of the EC element is generally configured in
a vehicular rearview assembly that additionally contains a carrier
having an extended portion disposed along the fourth surface of the
EC element and a ridge portion extending substantially transversely
to the extended portion along a perimeter thereof. In a specific
embodiment, the ridge portion is characterized by a radius of
curvature of at least 2.5 mm. The carrier may also include a step
portion having a step surface configured to extend along the second
surface of the EC element, where the step surface carries a fourth
electrically-conductive layer disposed thereon and having a normal
projection onto the second surface that is adjacent to either of
normal projections of the transparent electrode or the reflective
electrode onto the second surface. The step surface additionally
carries a graphical layer disposed on top of the fourth
electrically-conductive layer and including graphical indicia. The
assembly additionally includes an auxiliary device selected from
the group consisting of an illumination assembly, a display, a
voice activated system, a compass system, a telephone system, a
highway toll booth interface, a telemetry system, a headlight
controller, a rain sensor, a tire pressure monitoring system, a
navigation system, a lane departure warning system, and an adaptive
cruise control system. A portion of the illumination assembly is
configured to highlight the graphical layer and transmit light
through the graphical indicia towards a field of view at the front
of the assembly. In a specific embodiment, the second substrate has
an area that is smaller than an area of the first substrate, the
first substrate is configured to transversely extend beyond the
second substrate such as to define a ledge along at least a portion
of a perimeter of the second substrate, and the third
electrically-conductive layer is disposed on said ledge. Moreover,
the fourth electrically-conductive layer is, optionally,
electrically extended, through a passage in the extended portion of
the carrier to a circuitry at a back of the assembly so as to
define a capacitive switch adapted to operate in response to an
input applied to a front of the assembly.
[0011] Embodiments of the invention additionally provide a
vehicular rearview assembly including (i) an electrochromic (EC)
element (having first and second substrates where the first
substrate includes first and second mutually opposing surfaces,
corresponds to a front of the rearview assembly, and has a profile
that is graded, in a peripheral region along a circumference of the
first surface, with a radius of at least 2.5 mm); (ii) a second
substrate (having third and fourth surfaces, the third surface
having a reflective electrode thereon, the fourth surface
corresponding to the back of the assembly, the second and third
surfaces facing each other and mutually secured with a ring of seal
material so as to define a cavity hosting an EC medium); and (iii)
a carrier configured to support the EC element from its back and
having an extended portion disposed along the fourth surface and a
peripheral portion adapted to protrude transversely from the
extended portion so as to accommodate said second substrate on an
inboard side of the peripheral portion. The second surface of the
EC element generally carries a thin-film stack that includes a
transparent electrode and a peripheral ring of material configured
to substantially conceal the seal from being visible from the
front. In a specific embodiment, a transparent electrode include a
TCO layer disposed on top of the peripheral ring. In a related
specific embodiment, the second surface additionally includes a
second layer of TCO disposed adjacently to the transparent
electrode layer along a portion of a periphery of said second
surface. At least one of the transparent and reflective electrodes
is electrically extended to the back of the assembly through a
conductive member. The peripheral portion defines a step that is
substantially parallel to the second surface and that carries a
patch of electrically-conductive layer electrically extended,
through a passage in the extended portion, to a circuitry at the
back of the assembly so as to define a capacitive switch adapted to
operate in response to an input applied to the front of the
assembly. The patch of the electrically-conductive material has a
normal projection onto the second surface that is adjacent to
either of normal projections of the transparent electrode or the
reflective electrode on the same second surface. In one embodiment,
the normal projection of the patch onto the second surface overlaps
with the second layer of TCO. Optionally, the second layer of the
TCO may be larger than an area of the patch of
electrically-conductive material.
[0012] An embodiment of the assembly may additionally include (iv)
a graphical layer carrying graphical indicia therein and disposed
on top of the patch of electrically-conductive material; and (v) a
source of light configured to highlight the graphical layer and
transmit light through the graphical indicia towards a field of
view at the front of the assembly. Additionally, an area of the
first substrate may be larger than an area of the second substrate,
and the first substrate may extend transversely beyond the second
substrate such as to define a ledge, the light transmitted through
said graphical indicia being observable through the ledge.
[0013] Embodiments of the invention also provide a vehicular
rearview assembly having a front surface and including a housing
system (with a casing defining an inner volume and an aperture, the
aperture corresponding to the front of the assembly), an optical
system (with a (i) mirror system having a substrate with a first
surface and a transflective element disposed behind the first
surface with respect to the front of the assembly; (ii) a first
source of light positioned behind the transflective element and
adapted to transmit light through the transflective element, the
aperture of the casing, and the first surface to a field-of-view
(FOV) at the front of the assembly), and first and second sensors.
The optical system is structurally supported by the housing and at
least partially disposed within the volume of the casing such as to
have the first surface be unobstructingly observable from the front
of the assembly. The first sensor is configured to activate, in
response to a first user input, at least one auxiliary device
chosen from a group consisting of an interior illumination
assembly, a digital voice processing system, a power supply, a
global positioning system, an exterior light control, a moisture
sensor, an information display, a light sensor, a blind spot
indicator, a turning signal indicator, an approach warning, an
operator interface, a compass, a temperature indicator, a voice
actuated device, a microphone, a dimming circuitry, a GPS device, a
telecommunication system, a navigation aid, a lane departure
warning system, an adaptive cruise control, a vision system, a rear
vision system and a tunnel detection system of the assembly. The
second sensor is configured to cause, in response to a second user
input, locking of the operation of the first sensor.
[0014] In one embodiment, the first sensor includes a capacitive
sensor having a first electrically-conductive pad disposed on a
portion of the optical system. In a related embodiment, the second
sensor includes a capacitive sensor having an
electrically-conductive pad disposed on a surface of said casing
behind said first surface. In particular, the first sensor may
include a capacitive sensor having a first electrically-conductive
pad disposed on a surface of the optical system, and the second
sensor may includes a capacitive sensor having an
electrically-conductive pad disposed on the same surface on a side
of the first electrically-conductive pad. In one embodiment, the
electrically-conductive pad of the second switch is spatially
distributed on an inner portion of the housing system in electrical
cooperation with electronic circuitry at the back of the assembly
such as to cause locking of the operation of the first sensor in
response to change in angular position of the assembly. In a
specific embodiment, the second user input is configured to
simultaneously activate said first and second sensors. In one
embodiment, the second sensor includes an optical sensor.
[0015] In one embodiment, the optical system further includes an
indicator configured to produce, in response to activation of the
at least one auxiliary, an optical output observable from the front
of the assembly; and optical means for backlighting said indicator
with light from a second source of light within the assembly.
Optionally, the optical means includes a lightpipe having input and
output lightpipe ends, the output end adapted to couple light from
the second source of light into the indicator. Optionally, the
mirror system includes an optically-transparent ledge defined by
two substrates that sandwich said transflective element
therebetween, and optical system further includes optical indicia
configured to be illuminated from a back of the assembly through
the ledge and thereby uniquely identify the first sensor.
[0016] In one embodiment, the housing structure is characterized by
an annular region around the perimeter thereof, the annular region
having a radius of no less than 2.5 mm. Optionally, this annular
region is an annular region around the perimeter of the first
substrate.
[0017] In a specific embodiment, the first substrate of the mirror
system includes a laminate of two lites of glass, and the first
sensor includes an electrically-conductive pad between said two
lites of glass, the electrically-conductive pad being
electrically-extended through a connector to an electrical
circuitry at a back of the assembly. An outer edge of the laminate
is curved at a radius of no less than 2.5 mm around a perimeter of
the laminate, and said connector adjoins the curved outer edge.
[0018] Embodiments of the invention further provide a vehicular
rearview assembly having a front surface and including: [0019] A
housing system including a casing defining an inner volume and an
aperture, the aperture corresponding to the front of the assembly;
[0020] An optical system having a mirror system (including (i) a
substrate with a first surface and a transflective element disposed
behind the first surface with respect to the front of the assembly,
where the transflective element is characterized by transmittance
that is variable in response to voltage applied to the
transflective element; (ii) a reflective optical polarizer disposed
across a surface of the transflective element; and (iii) a first
source of light positioned behind the transflective element and
adapted to transmit light through the transflective element, said
reflective optical polarizer, the aperture, and the first surface
to a field-of-view (FOV) at the front of the assembly. The
reflective optical polarizer may include an optically-anisotropic
plastic layer. The optical system is generally structurally
supported by the housing and is at least partially disposed within
the volume of the housing such as to have the first surface be
unobstructingly observable from the front of the assembly; and
[0021] First and second sensors, the first sensor configured to
activate (in response to a first user input) an auxiliary device of
the assembly, while the second sensor is configured to cause (in
response to a second user input) locking of the operation of the
first sensor for a period of time defined by the second user
input.
[0022] In a specific embodiment, the mirror system of the assembly
is configured to reflect ambient light, incident from said FOV,
with efficiency of at least 55 percent. In a specific embodiment,
the optical system of the assembly further comprises a second
substrate having an extent smaller than that of the first substrate
and coordinated with the first substrate such as to define a ledge
a conductive layer disposed behind a pad of the first sensor.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
[0023] FIG. 1 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a portion of
the conventional EO mirror assembly;
[0024] FIG. 2 depicts a controlled vehicle;
[0025] FIG. 3A depicts an assembly incorporating an electro-optic
element;
[0026] FIG. 3B depicts an exploded view of an outside rearview
mirror;
[0027] FIG. 4 depicts an inside rearview mirror assembly
incorporating an electro-optic element;
[0028] FIG. 5 is a front elevational view schematically
illustrating a rearview mirror system constructed in accordance
with the present invention.
[0029] FIG. 6 depicts an exploded view of an interior rearview
mirror assembly.
[0030] FIGS. 7(A-E) illustrate embodiments of patterning of an
eye-hole of a rearview assembly.
[0031] FIG. 7F provides illustration to segregation effects in an
EC element.
[0032] FIG. 7G shows examples of transmittance changes for EC
elements with and without segregation.
[0033] FIG. 7H provides examples of % full scale behavior of the EC
element during clearing.
[0034] FIGS. 8(A-D) illustrate various modalities pertaining to
embodiments of the invention. FIG. 8A: electrical contacting
modalities; FIGS. 8(B-D): embodiments of plug configurations.
[0035] FIG. 9 shows a bezel-less embodiment having an EC-element
based mirror system with a rounded edge.
[0036] FIGS. 10(A-C) provide illustrations related to another
embodiment having an EC-element based mirror system with a rounded
edge.
[0037] FIGS. 11A-13C show embodiments of invention having a lipless
frame of the mirror system.
[0038] FIGS. 14(A-C) illustrate embodiments with a user interface
including an optical interrupter.
[0039] FIG. 15 schematically shows an embodiment with a user
interface having three line-of-sight sensors.
[0040] FIG. 16 illustrates an embodiment with a user interface
employing an optical reflective sensor.
[0041] FIG. 17 illustrates an alternative embodiment with a user
interface employing an optical reflective sensor.
[0042] FIGS. 18(A, B) show embodiments employing a user interface
having an "on-glass" type of capacitive sensor.
[0043] FIGS. 19(A-C) show embodiments employing a user interface
having a "through-glass" type of capacitive sensor.
[0044] FIGS. 20(A, B) show an embodiment employing a user interface
having an "in-glass" type of capacitive sensor.
[0045] FIGS. 20(C-G) show embodiments employing a user interface
having a "through-bezel" type of a capacitive sensor or a field
sensor.
[0046] FIGS. 21(A-C) illustrate embodiment having a "capacitive
conductive bezel" type of user interface.
[0047] FIG. 22 shows an embodiment where a user interface employs
an optical waveguide element.
[0048] FIG. 23A illustrates an embodiment of a single-band
peripheral ring used with the rearview assembly of the present
invention.
[0049] FIG. 23B illustrated an embodiment of a multi-band
peripheral ring used with the rearview assembly of the present
invention.
[0050] FIG. 24A shows a specific embodiment of a mirror system of
the invention including a multi-band peripheral ring.
[0051] FIG. 24B illustrates a two-lite embodiment of an
electro-optic (EO) element having a two-band peripheral ring and a
double seal the components of which correspond tom the two
bands.
[0052] FIG. 24C illustrates a non-specularly reflecting peripheral
ring of an embodiment of invention.
[0053] FIGS. 25(A-D) show various embodiments of a two-band
peripheral ring used in w mirror system of a rearview assembly of
the invention.
[0054] FIG. 26 illustrates a mask construction means used to
fabricate an embodiment of a two-band peripheral ring of the
invention.
[0055] FIG. 27 shows an embodiment of a two-band peripheral ring
having a non-uniform thickness.
[0056] FIG. 28(A, B) illustrate an embodiment of a two-band
peripheral ring with a portion that is transflective. A sensor is
positioned behind the transflective portion of a two-band
peripheral ring.
[0057] FIG. 28C illustrates transmission and reflection spectra of
one embodiment of a transflective thin-film stack used on a second
surface of the mirror system of the invention.
[0058] FIGS. 29(A-D) illustrate alternative embodiments and uses of
a transflective multi-band peripheral ring of the invention.
[0059] FIG. 30(A-C) show variations in reflectance values as
functions of real and imaginary parts of refractive index of a
metal layer used for reflectance-enhancement in three corresponding
embodiments of the invention.
[0060] FIGS. 31(A, B) illustrate a derivation of formula
facilitating the determination of a metallic material for
reflectance-enhancement in embodiments of the invention.
[0061] FIG. 32A depicts an EC-element structure having a ledge
defined by the optical substrates.
[0062] FIGS. 32B and 32C illustrate substrate pairs usable to
define an EC-element of FIG. 32A.
[0063] FIGS. 33(A, B) schematically illustrate, in cross-sectional
views, portions of embodiments of EC-element including a capacitive
switch and portions of corresponding carriers of the present
invention that have rounded peripheral edges.
[0064] FIG. 34 depicts a portion of an EC-element embodiment
including a capacitive switch and having a front substrate with
appropriately ground peripheral edge.
[0065] FIGS. 35(A-C) illustrate alternative embodiments of the
invention.
[0066] FIG. 36 shows an embodiment of the carrier of the rearview
assembly.
[0067] FIGS. 37(A-B) and 38 illustrate additional embodiments of
the invention.
[0068] FIGS. 39(A, B, C) schematically show a mirror system of the
rearview assembly utilizing various embodiments of a capacitive
switch.
[0069] FIGS. 40(A-C) illustrate potions of embodiments implementing
a capacitive switch in coordination with a composite substrate of
the mirror system.
[0070] FIGS. 41 and 42 illustrate alternative embodiments
implementing a capacitive switch in coordination with a composite
substrate of the mirror system.
[0071] FIGS. 43 and 44 illustrate additional embodiments
implementing a capacitive switch in coordination with a composite
substrate of the mirror system.
[0072] FIG. 45 show pairs of substrates cooperated to implement
corresponding embodiments of the invention.
[0073] FIG. 46(A, B) illustrate, in different views, a notched pair
of substrate and an embodiment of the peripheral ring region for
use with a mirror system of the rearview assembly.
[0074] FIG. 46C illustrates a notched pair of substrate and another
embodiment of the peripheral ring region for use with a mirror
system of the rearview assembly.
[0075] FIG. 46D shows a front view of an embodiment of the mirror
system containing capacitive switches.
[0076] FIGS. 46(E-J) shows embodiments implementing capacitive
switches and corresponding optical indicators.
[0077] FIGS. 47 and 48 illustrate, in different views, a sized-down
pair of optical substrates and an embodiment of the peripheral ring
region for use with a mirror system of the rearview assembly.
[0078] FIG. 49 is an exploded view of a portion of a rearview
assembly employing an embodiment of the invention.
[0079] FIG. 50A is another exploded view a portion of a rearview
assembly employing an embodiment of the invention.
[0080] FIG. 50B is a front view of a carrier and a portion of the
backlight system of the portion of FIGS. 49 and 50A.
[0081] FIG. 50C provides a cross section corresponding to the view
of FIG. 50B.
[0082] FIG. 50D illustrates an embodiment of a lightpipe and a
supporting structure.
[0083] FIG. 51 shows an exemplary embodiment including an EC
element, a capacitive switch, and a lock-out switch for use in a
rearview assembly of the invention.
[0084] FIGS. 52(A-D) illustrate several implementations of a
lock-out switch.
[0085] FIG. 53 schematically shows positioning of optical
indicators operably coordinated with a capacitive switch of an
embodiment of the invention.
[0086] FIGS. 54(A-D) depict embodiments of electrical connectors
for use with EC-elements and capacitive switches of embodiments of
the invention.
[0087] FIGS. 55(A-E) illustrate a double-sided connector and its
use in an embodiment of the invention.
[0088] FIGS. 55(F, G) show an alternative embodiment of an
electrical interconnect.
[0089] FIGS. 56(A, B) show a simplified cross-sectional view
corresponding to embodiments of an EC-element of the invention.
[0090] FIG. 57 is a contact force vs. displacement plot for the
embodiment of FIGS. 55(A-C).
[0091] FIGS. 58(A-F) show schematically embodiments of a
reconfigurable switch.
[0092] FIGS. 59(A-C) show schematically embodiments having
transparent switch and/or switch area.
[0093] FIG. 60 shows a characteristic pertaining to a peripheral
ring disposed on a textured glass surface.
[0094] FIGS. 61(A-D) illustrate schematically process of shaping an
edge of a peripheral ring with laser ablation.
[0095] FIG. 62 shows an SEM image of a laser-ablated edge of a
peripheral ring.
[0096] FIG. 63 provides illustration to discussion of galvanic
corrosion of a thin-film stack of an embodiment of the
invention.
[0097] FIGS. 64(A,B) illustrate thin-film structures for use in an
embodiment of the peripheral ring of the EC-element of the
vehicular rearview assembly that are optimized for photopically
adjusted and scotopically adjusted vision of the user,
respectively.
[0098] FIG. 65 illustrates the thin-films structures for use in an
embodiment of the peripheral ring of the EC-element of the
vehicular rearview assembly that are optimized for both
photopically and scotopicaly adjusted vision of the user.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
[0099] As used in this description and the accompanying claims, the
following terms shall have the meanings indicated, unless the
context otherwise requires:
[0100] "Transflective" describes an optical element or component
that has a useful non-zero level of transmittance and also has a
useful, non-zero level of reflectance in a specified spectral
region. In the context of an image-forming reflector, such as a
mirror for viewing reflected images, for example, the viewer in
front of the mirror may not only observe an image of the ambient
objects, formed in reflection from such transflective area but also
receive information contained in the displayed image delivered with
light from the light source located behind the transflective area
of the mirror.
[0101] The spectrum of light reflected (and that of light
transmitted) by an embodiment of the mirror system of the invention
can be tuned or modified by adjusting the thickness of the
reflectance-enhancing layers. The peak reflectance will vary with
optical design wavelength and this will result in a change in color
gamut of the reflected (and transmitted) light. In discussing color
distributions (i.e., spectra of light), it is useful to refer to
the Commission Internationale de I'Eclairage's (CIE) 1976 CIELAB
Chromaticity Diagram (commonly referred to the L*a*b* chart or
quantification scheme). The technology of color is relatively
complex, but a fairly comprehensive discussion is given by F. W.
Billmeyer and M. Saltzman in Principles of Color Technology,
2.sup.nd Edition, J. Wiley and Sons Inc. (1981). The present
disclosure, as it relates to color technology and uses appropriate
terminology, generally follows that discussion. As used in this
application, Y (sometimes also referred to as Cap Y), represents
either the overall reflectance or the overall transmittance,
depending on context. L*, a*, and b* can be used to characterize
parameters of light in either transmission or reflection. According
to the L*a*b* quantification scheme, L* represents brightness and
is related to the eye-weighted value of either reflectance or
transmittance (also known as normalized Y Tristimulus value) by the
Y Tristimulus value of a white reference, Yref: L*=116*(Y/Yref)-16.
The a*-parameter is a color coordinate that denotes the color gamut
ranging from red (positive a*) to green (negative a*), and b* is a
color coordinate that denotes the color gamut ranging from yellow
and blue (positive and negative values of b*, respectively). For
example, absorption spectra of an electrochromic medium, as
measured at any particular voltage applied to the medium, may be
converted to a three-number designation corresponding to a set of
L*a*b* values. To calculate a set of color coordinates, such as
L*a*b* values, from the spectral transmission or reflectance, two
additional parameters are required. One is the spectral power
distribution of the source or illuminant. The present disclosure
uses CIE Standard Illuminant A to simulate light from automobile
headlamps and uses CIE Standard Illuminant D.sub.65 to simulate
daylight. The second parameter is the spectral response of the
observer. Many of the examples below refer to a (reflectance) value
Y from the 1931 CIE Standard since it corresponds more closely to
the spectral reflectance than L*. The value of "color magnitude",
or C*, is defined as C*= {square root over
((a*).sup.2+(b*).sup.2)}{square root over ((a*).sup.2+(b*).sup.2)}
and provides a measure for quantifying color neutrality. The metric
of "color difference", or .DELTA.C* is defined as .DELTA.C*=
{square root over ((a*-a*').sup.2+(b*-b*').sup.2)}{square root over
((a*-a*').sup.2+(b*-b*').sup.2)}, where (a*, b*) and (a*',b*')
describe color of light obtained in two different measurements.
Additional CIELAB metric is defined as
.DELTA.E*=(.DELTA.a*.sup.2+.DELTA.b*.sup.2+.DELTA.L*.sup.2).sup.1/2.
The color values described herein are based, unless stated
otherwise, on the CIE Standard D65 illuminant and the 10-degree
observer.
[0102] An optical element such as a mirror is said to be relatively
color neutral in reflected light if the reflecting element is
configured to have a corresponding C* less than, generally, 20.
Preferably, however, a color-neutral optical element is
characterized by the C* value of less than 15, and more preferably
of less than about 10.
[0103] As broadly used and described herein, the reference to an
electrode or a material layer as being "carried" on a surface of an
element refers to such an electrode or layer that is disposed
either directly on the surface of an underlying element or on
another coating, layer or layers that are disposed directly on the
surface of the element.
[0104] The terms "adjacent" and "adjacently" are generally defined
as "being in close proximity to but without actually touching", in
comparison with the terms "adjoining" and "adjoiningly" that are
defined as "located next to another and being in contact at some
point or line".
[0105] References throughout this specification to "one
embodiment," "an embodiment," "a related embodiment," or similar
language mean that a particular feature, structure, or
characteristic described in connection with the referred to
"embodiment" is included in at least one embodiment of the present
invention. Thus, appearances of the phrases "in one embodiment,"
"in an embodiment," and similar language throughout this
specification may, but do not necessarily, all refer to the same
embodiment. It is to be understood that no portion of disclosure,
taken on its own and/or in reference to a figure, is intended to
provide a complete description of all features of the
invention.
[0106] In addition, in drawings, with reference to which the
following disclosure may describe features of the invention, like
numbers represent the same or similar elements wherever possible.
In the drawings, the depicted structural elements are generally not
to scale, and certain components are enlarged relative to the other
components for purposes of emphasis and understanding. It is to be
understood that no single drawing is intended to support a complete
description of all features of the invention. In other words, a
given drawing is generally descriptive of only some, and generally
not all, features of the invention. A given drawing and an
associated portion of the disclosure containing a description
referencing such drawing do not, generally, contain all elements of
a particular view or all features that can be presented is this
view in order to simplify the given drawing and the discussion, and
to direct the discussion to particular elements that are featured
in this drawing.
[0107] A skilled artisan will recognize that the invention may
possibly be practiced without one or more of the specific features,
elements, components, structures, details, or characteristics, or
with the use of other methods, components, materials, and so forth.
Therefore, although a particular detail of an embodiment of the
invention may not be necessarily shown in each and every drawing
describing such embodiment, the presence of this detail in the
drawing may be implied unless the context of the description
requires otherwise. In other instances, well known structures,
details, materials, or operations may be not shown in a given
drawing or described in detail to avoid obscuring aspects of an
embodiment of the invention that are being discussed. Furthermore,
the described features, structures, or characteristics of the
invention may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more
embodiments.
[0108] For example, to simplify a particular drawing of an
electro-optical device of the invention not all thin-film coatings
(whether electrically conductive, reflective, or absorptive or
other functional coatings such as alignment coatings or passivation
coatings), electrical interconnections between or among various
elements or coating layers, elements of structural support (such as
holders, clips, supporting plates, or elements of housing, for
example), or auxiliary devices (such as sensors, for example) may
be depicted in a single drawing. It is understood, however, that
practical implementations of discussed embodiments may contain some
or all of these features and, therefore, such coatings,
interconnections, structural support elements, or auxiliary devices
are implied in a particular drawing, unless stated otherwise, as
they may be required for proper operation of the particular
embodiment.
[0109] The invention as recited in claims appended to this
disclosure is intended to be assessed in light of the disclosure as
a whole, including features disclosed in prior art to which
reference is made.
[0110] Numbering of Structural Surfaces.
[0111] In describing the order of elements or components in
embodiments of a vehicular rearview assembly or a sub-set of a
vehicular rearview assembly, the following convention will be
generally followed herein, unless stated otherwise. The order in
which the surfaces of sequentially positioned structural elements
of the assembly (such as substrates made of glass or other
translucent material) are viewed is the order in which these
surfaces are referred to as the first surface (or surface I), the
second surface (or surface II), the third surface (or surface III),
and other surfaces (IV, V and so on), if present, are referred to
in ascending order. Generally, therefore, surfaces of the
structural elements (such as substrates) of an embodiment of the
invention are numerically labeled starting with a surface that
corresponds to the front portion of a rearview assembly and that is
proximal to the observer or user of the assembly and ending with a
surface that corresponds to the back portion of an assembly and
that is distal to the user. Accordingly, the term "behind" refers
to a position, in space, following something else and suggests that
one element or thing is at the back of another as viewed from the
front of the rearview assembly. Similarly, the term "in front of"
refers to a forward place or position, with respect to a particular
element as viewed from the front of the assembly.
[0112] The present disclosure refers to U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,902,108;
5,128,799; 5,151,824; 5,278,693; 5,280,380; 5,282,077; 5,294,376;
5,336,448; 5,448,397; 5,679,283; 5,682,267; 5,689,370; 5,803,579;
5,808,778; 5,818,625; 5,825,527; 5,837,994; 5,888,431; 5,923,027;
5,923,457; 5,928,572; 5,940,201; 5,956,012; 5,990,469; 5,998,617;
6,002,511; 6,008,486; 6,020,987; 6,023,229; 6,037,471; 6,049,171;
6,057,956; 6,062,920; 6,064,509; 6,084,700; 6,102, 546; 6,111,683;
6,111,684; 6,129,507; 6,130,421; 6,130,448; 6,132,072; 6,140,933;
6,166,848; 6,170,956; 6,188,505; 6,193,378; 6,193,912; 6,195,194;
6,222,177; 6,224,716; 6,229,435; 6,238,898; 6,239,898; 6,244,716;
6,246,507; 6,247,819; 6,249,369; 6,255,639; 6,262,831; 6,262,832;
6,268,950; 6,281,632; 6,291,812; 6,313,457; 6,335,548; 6,356,376;
6,359,274; 6,379,013; 6,392,783; 6,399,049; 6,402,328; 6,403,942;
6,407,468; 6,420,800; 6,426,485; 6,429,594; 6,441,943; 6,465,963;
6,469,739; 6,471,362; 6,504,142; 6,512,624; 6,521,916; 6,523,976;
6,471,362; 6,477,123; 6,521,916; 6,545,794; 6,587,573; 6,614,579;
6,635,194; 6,650,457; 6,657,767; 6,774,988; 6,816,297; 6,861,809;
6,968,273; 6,700,692; 7,064,882; 7,287,868; 7,324,261; 7,342,707;
7,417,717; 7,663,798; 7,688,495; 7,706,046 and D410,607. The
present application also refers to the International Patent
Applications Nos. PCT/WO97/EP498; PCT/WO98/EP3862, U.S. Patent
Application Nos. 60/360,723; 60/404,879; 11/682,121; 11/713,849;
11/833,701; 12/138,206; 12/154,824; 12/370,909; 12/563,917;
12/496,620; 12/629,757; 12/686,019; 12/774,721, and U.S.
Provisional Patent Application No. 61/392,119 filed on Oct. 12,
2010. The disclosure of each of the abovementioned patent documents
is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. All these
patent documents may be collectively referred to herein as "Our
Prior Applications".
[0113] Although EC-elements for use in vehicular mirror systems and
rearview assemblies incorporating such elements and systems have
been taught in detail in Our Prior Applications, the following
provides an overview of subject matter sufficient to build upon
when considering embodiments of the present invention. Referring
initially to FIG. 2, there is shown a controlled vehicle 200 having
a driver's side outside rearview mirror 210a, a passenger's side
outside rearview mirror 210b and an inside rearview mirror 215.
Details of these and other features will be described herein.
Preferably, the controlled vehicle comprises an inside rearview
mirror of unit magnification. A unit magnification mirror, as used
herein, refers to a mirror with a plane or flat reflective element
producing an image having perceived angular and linear sizes equal
to those of the object. Deviations from unit magnification
resulting from conventional processing of components of an inside
rearview mirror and ways of reducing or eliminating such deviations
have been addressed, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 7,688,495, the
teachings of which include modified thin-film deposition techniques
resulting in reduced warp of a mirror substrate upon a surface of
which a transparent layer of conductive oxide has been disposed. A
prismatic day-night adjustment rearview mirror which in at least
one associated position provides unit magnification is considered
to be a unit magnification mirror. Preferably, each outside mirror
comprises not less than 126 cm of reflective surface and is located
so as to provide the driver a view to the rear along an associated
side of the controlled vehicle. Preferably, the average reflectance
of any mirror, as determined in accordance with SAE Recommended
Practice J964, OCT84, is at least 35 percent (40 percent for many
European Countries). In embodiments where the mirror element is
capable of operating at multiple reflectance levels, the minimum
reflectance level in the day mode shall be at least 35 percent (40
percent when mirror is fabricated according to European standards)
and the minimum reflectance level in the night mode shall be at
least 4 percent.
[0114] With further reference to FIG. 2, the controlled vehicle 200
may comprise a variety of exterior lights, such as, headlight
assemblies 220a, 220b; foul condition lights 230a, 230b; front
turn-signal indicators 235a, 235b; taillight assembly 225a, 225b;
rear turn signal indicators 226a, 226b; rear emergency flashers
227a, 227b; backup lights 240a, 240b and center high-mounted stop
light (CHMSL) 245.
[0115] As described in detail herein, the controlled vehicle may
comprise at least one control system incorporating various
components that provide shared functions with other vehicle
equipment. An example of one control system described herein
integrates various components associated with automatic control of
the reflectivity of at least one rearview mirror element and
automatic control of at least one exterior light. Such systems may
comprise at least one image sensor within a rearview mirror, an
A-pillar, a B-pillar, a C-pillar, a CHMSL or elsewhere within or
upon the controlled vehicle. Images acquired, or portions thereof,
by a sensor may be used for automatic vehicle equipment control.
The images, or portions thereof, may alternatively or additionally
be displayed on one or more displays. At least one display may be
covertly positioned behind a transflective, or at least partially
transmissive, electro-optic element. A common controller may be
configured to generate at least one mirror element drive signal and
at least one other equipment control signal.
Exterior and Interior Rearview Assemblies.
[0116] Turning now to FIGS. 3A and 3B, various components of a
typical outside (or exterior) rearview mirror assembly 310a, 310b
are depicted. An EO mirror element may comprise a first substrate
320a, 320b secured in a spaced apart relationship with a second
substrate 325 via a primary seal 330 to form a chamber there
between. At least a portion of the primary seal is left void to
form at least one chamber fill port 335. An EO medium is enclosed
in the chamber and the fill port(s) are sealingly closed via a plug
material 340. Preferably, the plug material is a UV-curable epoxy
or acrylic material. Also shown is a spectral filter material 345a,
345b located near the periphery of the element. Generally, this
optical thin-film spectral filter material 345a, 345b is
circumferentially disposed in a peripheral area, next to a
corresponding perimeter-defining edge, of either of the first and
the second surface of the system, and is configured as a ring. Such
ring of the spectral filter material is interchangeably referred to
herein as a peripheral ring. The electrical clips 350, 355 are
preferably secured to the element, respectively, via first adhesive
material 351, 352. The element is secured to a carrier plate 360
via second adhesive material 365. Electrical connections from the
outside rearview mirror to other components of the controlled
vehicle are preferably made via a connector 370. The carrier is
attached to an associated housing mount 376 via a positioner 380.
Preferably, the housing mount is engaged with a housing 375a, 375b
and secured via at least one fastener 376b. Preferably, the housing
mount comprises a swivel portion configured to engage a swivel
mount 377a, 377b. The swivel mount is preferably configured to
engage a vehicle mount 378 via at least one fastener 378b.
Additional details of these components, additional components,
their interconnections and operation are discussed below.
[0117] With further reference to FIG. 3A, the outside rearview
mirror assembly 310a is oriented such that a view of the first
substrate 320a is shown with the spectral filter material 345a
positioned between the viewer and the primary seal material (not
shown). A blind spot indicator 385, a keyhole illuminator 390, a
puddle light 392, a turn signal 394, a photo sensor 396, any one
thereof, a subcombination thereof or a combination thereof may be
incorporated within the rearview mirror assembly such that they are
positioned behind the mirror element with respect to the viewer.
Preferably, the devices 385, 390, 392, 394, 396 are configured in
combination with the mirror element to be at least partially covert
as discussed in detail within various references incorporated by
reference herein. Additional details of these components,
additional components, their interconnections and operation are
further discussed in reference to FIG. 65, below.
[0118] Turning now to FIG. 4, there is shown an inside (or
interior) rearview mirror assembly 410, as viewed when looking at
the first substrate 420, with a spectral filter material or
peripheral ring 445 positioned between the viewer and a primary
seal material (not shown). The mirror element is shown to be
positioned within a movable housing 475 and combined with a
stationary housing 477 on a mounting structure 481. The mirror
housing 477 (which may include a bezel portion) supports not only
opto-electronic components and devices such as a reflective element
and an information display, but various assembly function actuators
such as button and keys. Commonly assigned U.S. Pat. No. 6,102,546;
D 410,607; 6,407,468; 6,420,800; and U.S. patent application Ser.
No. 09/687,743, the disclosures of which are incorporated in their
entireties herein by reference, describe various bezels, cases, and
associated button constructions for use with the present invention.
Examples of mounting structures such as structures having means for
angular alignment of the mirror element with respect to the viewer
(such as a ball-and-socket pivoting mechanism) are disclosed in,
for example, the commonly-assigned U.S. patent application Ser. No.
12/832,838.
[0119] A first indicator 486, a second indicator 487, operator
interfaces 491 and a first photo sensor 496 are positioned in a
chin portion 490 of the movable housing. Operator interfaces 491
are configured to control any of functional systems or modalities
of the assembly such as, for example, an illumination assembly, a
display, mirror reflectivity, a voice-activated system, a compass
system, a telephone system, a highway toll booth interface, a
telemetry system, a headlight controller, and a rain sensor, to
name just a few. Generally, however, operator interfaces 491 can be
incorporated anywhere in the associated vehicle, for example, in
the mirror case, accessory module, instrument panel, overhead
console, dashboard, seats, center console. Some of the operator
interfaces 491 may include a switch (not shown) such as a proximity
switch, for example. Suitable switches for use with the present
invention are described in detail in commonly assigned U.S. Pat.
Nos. 6,407,468 and 6,420,800, 6,471,362, 6,614,579, 6,614,579, the
disclosures of which are incorporated in their entireties herein by
reference. Various indicators for use with the present invention
that attest to the status of any of the functional systems or
modalities of the assembly are described in commonly assigned U.S.
Pat. Nos. 5,803,579, 6,335,548, and 6,521,916, the disclosures of
which are incorporated in their entireties herein by reference.
[0120] A first information display 488, a second information
display 489 and a second photo sensor 497 are incorporated within
the assembly behind the mirror element with respect to the viewer.
As described with regard to the outside rearview mirror assembly,
it is preferable to have devices 488, 489, 497 at least partially
covert. For example, a "window" may be formed in third and/or
fourth surface coatings of the associated mirror element and
configured to provide a layer of a platinum group metal (PGM) (i.e.
iridium, osmium, palladium, platinum, rhodium, and ruthenium) only
on the third surface. Thereby, light rays impinging upon the
associated "covert" photo sensor "glare" will first pass through
the first surface stack, if any, the first substrate, the second
surface stack, the electro-optic medium, the platinum group metal
and, finally, the second substrate. The platinum group metal
functions to impart continuity in the third surface conductive
electrode, thereby reducing electro-optic medium coloring
variations associated with the window.
[0121] The rearview assembly 410 may additionally include at least
one illumination assembly a (not shown) that preferably comprises a
reflector, a lens, and an illuminator (not shown). Most preferably
there are two illumination assemblies with one generally positioned
to illuminate a front passenger seat area and the second generally
positioned to illuminate a driver seat area. There may be only one
or may be additional illuminator assemblies such as one to
illuminate a center console area, overhead console area, or an area
between the front seats. Various illumination assemblies and
illuminators for use with the present invention are described in
commonly assigned U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,803,579, 6,335,548, and
6,521,916, the disclosures of which are incorporated in their
entireties herein by reference.
[0122] The rearview assembly 410 may additionally include at least
one or more light sensors, the preferred embodiments of which are
described in detail in commonly assigned U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,923,027
and 6,313,457, the disclosures of which are incorporated in their
entireties herein by reference. For example, the glare sensor
and/or ambient sensor automatically control the reflectivity of a
self-dimming reflective element as well as the intensity of
information displays and/or backlighting. The glare sensor is used
to sense headlights of trailing vehicles and the ambient sensor is
used to detect the ambient lighting conditions that the system is
operating within. In another embodiment, a sky sensor may be
incorporated positioned to detect light levels generally above and
in front of an associated vehicle, the sky sensor may be used to
automatically control the reflectivity of a self-dimming element,
the exterior lights of a controlled vehicle and/or the intensity of
information displays.
[0123] FIG. 5 shows a front elevational view schematically
illustrating an interior mirror assembly 510 and two exterior
rearview mirror assemblies 210a and 210b for the driver side and
passenger side, respectively, all of which are adapted to be
installed on a motor vehicle in a conventional manner and where the
mirrors face the rear of the vehicle and can be viewed by the
driver of the vehicle to provide a rearward view. As mentioned
above, the interior rearview assembly 410 and exterior rearview
assemblies 210a and 210b may incorporate light-sensing electronic
circuitry of the type illustrated and described in the Canadian
Patent No. 1,300,945, U.S. Pat. No. 5,204,778, U.S. Pat. No.
5,451,822, U.S. Pat. No. 6,402,328, or U.S. Pat. No. 6,386,713 and
other circuits capable of sensing glare and ambient light and
supplying a drive voltage to the electro-optic element. The
disclosure of each of these patent documents is incorporated herein
by reference in its entirety.
[0124] Rearview assemblies 410, 210a, and 210b are essentially
similar in that like numbers identify components of the inside and
outside mirrors. These components may be slightly different in
configuration, but they function in substantially the same manner
and obtain substantially the same results as similarly numbered
components. For example, the shape of the front glass element of
inside rearview assembly 410 is generally longer and narrower than
outside rearview assemblies 210a and 210b. There are also some
different performance standards placed on inside assembly 410
compared with outside assembly 210a and 210b. For example, a mirror
of the inside assembly 410 generally, when fully cleared, should
have a reflectance value of about 70 percent to about 85 percent or
even higher, whereas the outside mirrors often have a reflectance
of about 50 percent to about 65 percent. Also, in the United States
(as supplied by the automobile manufacturers), a mirror of the
passenger-side assembly 210b typically has a spherically bent or
convex shape, whereas a mirror of the driver-side assembly 210a and
a mirror of the inside assembly 410 are presently required to be
flat. In Europe, a mirror of the driver-side assembly 210a is
commonly flat or aspheric, whereas a mirror of the passenger-side
assembly 210b has a convex shape. In Japan, both outside mirrors
typically have a convex shape. While the focus of the invention is
generally towards exterior mirrors, the following description is
generally applicable to all mirror assemblies of the present
invention including inside mirror assemblies. Moreover, certain
aspects of the present invention may be implemented in
electro-optic elements used in other applications such as
architectural windows, or the like, or even in other forms of
electro-optic devices.
[0125] An embodiment of a rearview mirror of the present invention
may include a housing having a bezel 544, which extends around the
entire periphery of each of individual assemblies 410, 210a, and/or
210b (or at least a portion of the periphery) and structurally
supports an edge surface of an optical element of a corresponding
assembly. However, as discussed below, the scope of the present
invention also includes embodiments having no bezel. When present,
a front lip of the bezel 544 that extends onto the first surface of
the optical element visually conceals and protects the buss
connector and the seal. A wide variety of bezel designs are well
known in the art, such as, for example, the bezel taught and
claimed in above-referenced U.S. Pat. No. 5,448,397.
[0126] FIG. 6 illustrates an exemplary exploded view 6400 of the
exemplary interior rearview assembly. As shown, the mirror assembly
comprises a reflective element 6405 within a bezel 6455 and a
mirror casing 6456. Bezel 6455 can be adapted to be like any of
bezels taught in Our Prior Applications, for example in U.S. patent
Ser. Nos. 11/066,903 and 10/430,885. A mirror mount 6457 is
included for mounting the mirror assembly within a vehicle. It
should be understood that a host of accessories may be incorporated
into the mount 6457 and/or onto the plate frame carrier 6421 in
addition to a power pack adjuster, such as a rain sensor, a camera,
a headlight control, an additional microprocessor, additional
information displays, compass sensors, etc. These systems may be
integrated, at least in part, in a common control with information
displays and/or may share components with the information displays.
In addition, the status of these systems and/or the devices
controlled thereby may be displayed on the associated information
displays.
[0127] The mirror assembly is shown in FIG. 6 to further comprise
third information display 6426 with third information display
backlighting 6437, 6438, 6439; first and second microphones 6460,
6461; and includes other known options such as a first reflector
with a first lens; a second reflector with a second lens; a glare
sensor; an ambient light sensor; first, second, third, and fourth
operator interfaces 6490, 6491, 6492, 6493 with first, second,
third, and fourth operator interface backlighting 6490a, 6491a,
6492a, 6493a; a circuit board 6495 having a compass sensor module
6499; and a daughter board 6498 with an input/output bus interface
6497.
[0128] Preferably, the illumination assemblies with associated a
light source of the assembly are constructed in accordance with the
teachings of commonly assigned U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,803,579 and
6,335,548, as well as U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/835,278,
the disclosures of which are incorporated in their entireties
herein by reference.
[0129] Preferably, the glare light sensor and the ambient light
sensor are active light sensors as described in commonly assigned
U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,359,274 and 6,402,328, the disclosures of which
are incorporated in their entireties herein by reference. The
electrical output signal from either or both of the sensors may be
used as inputs to a controller on the circuit board 6440 or 6495 to
control the reflectivity of reflective element 6405 and/or the
intensity of third information display backlighting. The details of
various control circuits for use herewith are described in commonly
assigned U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,956,012; 6,084,700; 6,222,177; 6,224,716;
6,247,819; 6,249,369; 6,392,783; and 6,402,328, the disclosures of
which are incorporated in their entireties herein by reference.
[0130] Although the compass sensor module 6499 of the embodiment
6505 is shown to be mounted circuit board 6495 in FIG. 6, it should
be understood that the sensor module may be located within mount
6457, an accessory module 6458 positioned proximate mirror assembly
6400 or at any location within an associated vehicle such as under
a dashboard, in an overhead console, a center console, a trunk, an
engine compartment, etc. Commonly assigned U.S. Pat. Nos.
6,023,229, 6,140,933, and 6,968,273 as well as commonly assigned
U.S. Patent Application 60/360,723, the disclosures of which are
incorporated in their entireties herein by reference, described in
detail various compass systems for use with the present
invention.
[0131] Daughter board 6498 is in operational communication with
circuit board 6495. Circuit board 6495 may comprise a controller
6496, such as a microprocessor, and daughter board 6498 may
comprise an information display. The microprocessor may, for
example, receive signal(s) from the compass sensor module 6499 and
process the signal(s) and transmit signal(s) to the daughter board
to control a display to indicate the corresponding vehicle heading.
As described herein and within the references incorporated by
reference herein, the controller may receive signal(s) from light
sensor(s), rains sensor(s) (not shown), automatic vehicle exterior
light controller(s) (not shown), microphone(s), global positioning
systems (not shown), telecommunication systems (not shown),
operator interface(s), and a host of other devices, and control the
information display(s) to provide appropriate visual
indications.
[0132] Controller 6496 (or controllers) may, at least in part,
control the mirror reflectivity, exterior lights, rain sensor,
compass, information displays, windshield wipers, heater,
defroster, defogger, air conditioning, telemetry systems, voice
recognition systems such as digital signal processor-based
voice-actuation systems, and vehicle speed. The controller 6496 (or
controllers) may receive signals from switches and/or sensors
associated with any of the devices described herein and in the
references incorporated by reference herein to automatically
manipulate any other device described herein or described in the
references included by reference. The controller 6496 may be, at
least in part, located outside the mirror assembly, or may comprise
a second controller elsewhere in the vehicle or additional
controllers throughout the vehicle. The individual processors may
be configured to communicate serially, in parallel, via Bluetooth
protocol, wireless communication, over the vehicle bus, over a CAN
bus or any other suitable communication.
[0133] Exterior light control systems as described in commonly
assigned U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,990,469; 6,008,486; 6,130,421; 6,130,448;
6,255,639; 6,049,171; 5,837,994; 6,403,942; 6,281,632; 6,291,812;
6,469,739; 6,399,049; 6,465,963; 6,587,573; 6,429,594; 6,379,013;
6,871,809; 6,774,988 and U.S. patent application Ser. Nos.
09/847,197; and 60/404,879, the disclosures of which are
incorporated in their entireties herein by reference, may be
incorporated in accordance with the present invention.
[0134] Moisture sensors and windshield fog detector systems are
described in commonly assigned U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,923,027 and
6,313,457, the disclosures of which are incorporated in their
entireties herein by reference. Commonly assigned U.S. Pat. No.
6,262,831, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by
reference in its entirety, describes power supplies for use with
the present invention.
[0135] It is contemplated that the present invention would be
useful in inside or outside rearview mirrors having electro-optic
mirror elements, convex mirror elements, aspheric mirror elements,
planar mirror elements, non-planar mirror elements, hydrophilic
mirror elements, hydrophobic mirror elements, and mirror elements
having third surface and fourth surface reflectors. It is further
contemplated that the present invention will be useful on mirrors
that are transflective, or that have a third or fourth surface
mirror element with patterns of lines (sometimes referred to as
"jail bars") thereon to optimize the effect of visible light.
Further, the present invention is useful with mirrors having first
surface or fourth surface heaters, anti-scratch layers, and circuit
boards including flexible circuit boards, and circuit board and
heater combinations, such as heaters having embedded or integrated
non-heater functions such as signal ellipses and signal diffusants,
locating holes or windows for light pass-through. The present
invention is also useful with potted or snap-attached or
elastomeric bezels, and useful with carriers having an ultra-flat
front surface. Also, additional options can be integrated into the
mirrors including signal lighting, key lights, radar distance
detectors, puddle lights, information displays, light sensors and
indicator and warning lighting, retainers with living hinges, and
integrated housings for receiving and supporting said components.
Still further, it is conceived that the present mirror can include
a manually folding or power folding mirrors, extendable mirrors,
and mirrors with a wide field of view, and with information on the
mirror such as "object in mirror is closer than may appear" or
other indicia, such as "heated" or "auto-dim". Still further, the
present invention is useful with a blue glass mirror or "blue
chemical" darkening mirror. Still further, efficiencies can be had
by incorporating the present concepts with mirrors having an
electrochromic mirror subassembly with front and rear glass mirror
elements with edges having a "zero offset" (i.e. less than an
average of about 1 mm, or more preferably, less than about 0.5 mm
difference between perfect alignment of edges of the mirror
elements), an edge seal, including clear reflective or opaque edge
seals, and/or second surface chrome or a chrome bezel. Generally,
however, the rear glass element of an EC mirror subassembly can be
smaller than the front glass element and disposed such as to be
concealed behind the front element as viewed from the front of the
assembly. In a specific embodiment, the circumference of the rear
glass element is smaller than that of the front glass element.
[0136] Although the present invention is further generally
described as being used in connection with EC devices such as
mirrors and architectural windows, those skilled in the art will
understand that various aspects of the present invention may be
employed in the construction of other electro-optic devices or
devices including a prismatic element.
[0137] It is appreciated that a typical exterior rearview assembly
(such as that of FIGS. 3A, 3B) may contain substantially the same
auxiliary devices as those described in reference to FIGS. 4 and 6.
Details of the housing/casing of an exemplary exterior rearview
assembly is taught in, for example, U.S. patent application Ser.
No. 12/832,838 and may comprise an attachment member and a
telescoping extension having a single arm with a linear actuator
for extending and retracting the telescoping extension from within
the associated vehicle. The telescoping extension may be
additionally configured such that the housing may be folded inward
toward the associated vehicle and outward away from the associated
vehicle. Various positioners and carriers that providing a secure
structure for supporting and moving of the associated reflective
element are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,195,194 and 6,239,899,
the disclosures of which are incorporated herein in their
entireties by reference. In at least one embodiment, an exterior
rearview mirror assembly is provided with a heater for improving
the operation of the device and for melting frozen precipitation
that may be present. Examples of various heaters are disclosed in
U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,151,824, 6,244,716, 6,426,485, 6,441,943 and
6,356,376, the disclosures of each of these patents are
incorporated in their entireties herein by reference.
[0138] In at least one embodiment, either an external or an
internal rearview assembly is equipped with an electrical circuitry
comprising a light source such as a turn signal light, a keyhole
illuminator, or an outside door area illuminator, as taught in U.S.
Pat. No. 6,441,943, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated
in its entirety herein by reference, an information display, an
antenna, a transceiver, a reflective element control, an outside
mirror communication system, a remote keyless entry system,
proximity sensors, and interfaces for other apparatus described
herein. U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,244,716, 6,523,976, 6,521,916, 6,441,943,
6,335,548, 6,132,072, 5,803,579, 6,229,435, 6,504,142, 6,402,328,
6,379,013, and 6,359,274 disclose various electrical components and
electrical circuit boards that may be employed in one or more
embodiments, the disclosures of each of each of these U.S. patents
are incorporated herein in their entireties by reference.
[0139] In at least one embodiment, the reflectance of the
reflective element of either the exterior or interior rearview
assembly can be varied (for example, via autodimming). Such
variable-reflectance reflective element may be configured to define
a convex element, an aspheric element, a planar element, a
non-planar element, a wide field of view element, or a combination
of these various configurations in different areas to define a
complex mirror element shape. The front surface of the first
substrate of the reflective element, that corresponds to the front
of the assembly, may comprise a hydrophilic or hydrophobic coating
to improve the operation. The reflective element may comprise
transflective properties such that a light source, or information
display, may be positioned behind the element and project light
rays therethrough. Attachment of the reflective element to a
carrier/portion of the housing structure is arranged, in at least
one embodiment, via a double-sided adhesive tape. The reflective
element may comprise an anti-scratch layer, or layers, on the
exposed surfaces of the first and, or, second substrates. The
reflective element may comprise area(s) that are devoid of
reflective material, such as etched in bars or words, to define
information display area(s). Examples of various reflective
elements are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,682,267, 5,689,370,
6,064,509, 6,062,920, 6,268,950, 6,195,194, 5,940,201, 6,246,507,
6,057,956, 6,512,624, 6,356,376, 6,166,848, 6,111,684, 6,193,378,
6,239,898, 6,441,943, 6,037,471, 6,020,987, 5,825,527 6,111,684 and
5,998,617, the disclosures of each of these patents are
incorporated in their entireties herein by reference.
[0140] Plethora of teachings describing various configurations of
an EC element or a prismatic element for use in a vehicular
rearview assembly is provided in Our Prior Applications. U.S.
2010/0321758, for example (in reference to FIGS. 6A through 16
therein), teaches different implementations of
electrically-conductive layers (such as, e.g., a layer of
transparent conductive oxide performing as a transparent electrode
preferably disposed on the second surface of the EC-cell, and a
thin-film stack including reflective and conductive layers
aggregately performing as a reflecting electrode of the third
surface of the EC-cell). U.S. 2010/0321758 also discusses numerous
incarnations of electrical interconnects between the
electrically-conductive layers (such as TCO layers, or IMI layers,
or combinations thereof, for example) and the electrical circuitry
of the assembly (see, e.g. FIGS. 6-16, 22-34 and associated
descriptions in U.S. 2010/0321758), EC-cavity perimeter sealing
members, and means for concealing such electrical interconnects and
sealing members from being optically accessible from the front of
the assembly.
[0141] As another example, the commonly-assigned U.S. Pat. No.
7,372,611 and the U.S. 2010/0321758 discuss (in reference to Tables
3F and 3G contained therein, for example) various thin-film
structures configured on the second surface of an EC-element of the
rearview assembly to provide a peripheral ring that not only has
high reflectance but also assures color matching between the
peripheral area of the rearview mirror and the major portion of the
viewing area (located within the peripheral area of the mirror). In
particular, the taught structures include a thin-film stack in
which a dielectric layer is sandwiched between the metallic
thin-film and the layer of the TCO, such as, for example, (i) a
sequence of a metallic thin-film, a film made of a low-index
material, and a film of the TCO; and (ii) a thin-film stack
containing a metallic thin film, a high/low/high index dielectric
stack, and a layer of TCO. However, the optical properties of the
peripheral ring may benefit from a different positioning of the
dielectric layers. For example, in a basic case where the second
surface of the EC element carries, in a peripheral region, a layer
of chrome (500 .ANG.) and a layer of ITO (1490 .ANG.) on top of the
chrome layer, the resulting stack has a reflectance of 56.0%
(a*=-1.6, b*=-3.0). However, the addition of high- and low-index
dielectric layers between the second surface of the front glass
substrate and the Cr-layer (thus yielding the following enhanced
structure: Glass/TiO.sub.2 (534 .ANG., index of 2.45)/SiO.sub.2
(848 .ANG.)/Cr (500 .ANG.)/ITO, increases the reflectance to 79.2%
(a*=-3.4, b*=1.6). The achieved reflectance enhancement is further
tunable by increasing the index contrast between the high- and
low-index layers. (Decreasing the index contrast achieves the
opposite effect). For instance, in the previous example of the
enhanced structure, the replacement of the TiO.sub.2 layer with
SnO.sub.2 (601 A) and the SiO.sub.2 layer with Al.sub.2O.sub.3 (741
A) yields an overall reflectance of the peripheral area of 66.2%
(a*=-4.8, b*=1.4). In addition, the thickness of the high- and
low-index layers can be used to tune the color to yield an improved
color match between the peripheral ring area and to the rest of the
mirror element. For example, if a bluer hue is preferred in the
above-defined enhanced structure, the thickness of the TiO.sub.2
layer can be reduced to 506 .ANG. and the thickness of the
SiO.sub.2 layer can be reduced to 801 .ANG. to yield a 78.9%
reflectance with an a* value of -3.3 and a b* value of -0.6.
Generally, a reduction of reflectance value of the peripheral ring
is be observed for significant deviation of the dielectric layers
from nominal quarter-wave thickness. The choice of the dielectric
layers may be based on a variety of properties including, but not
limited to, conductivity, index of refraction, extinction
coefficient, UV cutoff, chemical durability and environmental
stability.
[0142] As yet another example, the transparent conductive material
(TCO) used in various embodiments may be fluorine-doped tin oxide,
doped zinc oxide, indium zinc oxide (IZO), indium tin oxide (ITO),
ITO/metal/ITO or insulator/metal/insulator (IMI) and may further
include the materials described in above-referenced U.S. Pat. No.
5,202,787, such as TEC 20 or TEC 15, available from Libbey
Owens-Ford Co. of Toledo, Ohio. Material compositions of a
transparent electrode and it's opto-electronic characteristics such
as sheet resistance affecting the speed and uniformity of
coloration (or darkening) of the EC-medium of the EC element of the
assembly are discussed in details in U.S. 2010/0321758 and other
patent documents from Our Prior Applications.
[0143] A resistive heater may be disposed in the back of the mirror
element to heat the mirror and thereby clear the mirror of ice,
snow, fog, or mist. The resistive heater may optionally be a layer
of ITO, fluorine-doped tin oxide or may be other heater layers or
structures known in the art. Examples of the mirror heater are
taught, for example, in U.S. patent application Ser. No.
12/686,019.
[0144] Examples of various electrical circuits are taught in the
above-referenced Canadian Patent No. 1,300,945 and U.S. Pat. Nos.
5,204,778, 5,434,407, 5,451,822, 6,402,328, and 6,386,713.
[0145] Optical concealment of the sealing material and electrical
interconnects affixed to electrically-conductive layers of the
EC-element may be assured by appropriate shaping of an edge of the
first surface of the EC-element, or by configuring a peripheral
ring of spectral filter material, as discussed in Our Prior
Applications (see, e.g., FIGS. 14-16B of U.S. 2010/0321758). Yet
another way to conceal the seal is to use a seal material that is
transparent as disclosed in commonly assigned U.S. Pat. No.
5,790,298, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by
reference.
[0146] It is appreciated that embodiments of the present invention
draw on the teachings in our Prior Applications and that any of the
features of a rearview assembly described in Our Prior Applications
can be used with embodiments of the present invention as long as
operability of these embodiments is preserved.
Peripheral Ring and Sealing Material.
[0147] U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2010/0321758 offered
(in reference to FIGS. 17, 18, and 21 therein), a detail discussion
of structural and operation coordination of various features of a
typical EC-element based mirror and rearview assembly containing
such a mirror. The discussion included a description of disposition
of a spectral filter material (referred to as a peripheral ring)
that is configured to obstruct a sealing material, a plugging
material, and/or electrical connections associated with the
EC-element from being optically accessible from the front of the
assembly, as well as harmonious configuration of various thin-film
layers (such as electrically-conductive and reflective layers on
the second and third surfaces of the EC-element facilitating
fabrication of the EC-element. The discussion additionally included
descriptions of methods of fabrication of the EC-element
incorporating various notches, cuts-out and "windows" in optical
thin-film layers of the EC element in a rearview assembly
containing a source of light in order to accommodate a light
source, information display, a photo sensor, or a combination
thereof in the assembly to selectively transmit a particular
spectral band or bands of wavelengths towards the field of view in
the front of the assembly to provide required information to the
user. To this end, U.S. Patent Application Publication No.
2010/0321758 discussed (in reference to FIGS. 19A-C and Tables 1-4
therein) considerations related to structural elements of the
EC-element and the assembly (in particular, thin-film optical
structures and related methods of fabrication) that define spectral
characteristics of ambient light reflected by the optical system of
the assembly and light transmitted through the EC-element-based
mirror system of the assembly from a general light source (such as
a display behind said mirror system) towards the FOV in the front
of the assembly, and provided various examples of optical
structures for use in such mirror elements that possess the
required spectral and dimensional characteristics.
Considerations of Aesthetic Appearance and Styling.
[0148] As discussed in Our Prior Applications, in configuring a
rearview assembly--whether the issue concerns coating a surface of
an EC-element or a prismatic element (either of which may be
forming a basis for a mirror element of the assembly), or formation
of a peripheral ring on the first or second surface to mask the
seal and/or plug material and contact areas, or whether the issue
concerns shaping a perimeter of the mirror element--the aesthetics
of appearance of the resulting assembly product plays a critical
role in how successful the product is on the market. While the
aesthetics of the rearview assembly is not a tangible concept and
is generally guided by customer preferences, satisfying these
preferences is not a trivial task, and devising satisfactory
solutions often involves non-trivial balancing of design and
functionality of the resulting embodiments. Such balancing, in
turn, poses manufacturing problems that has to be addressed.
[0149] Various examples of such problems involving operational
coordination of structural elements of a rearview assembly (such as
housing, casing, mounting elements, including as well as devoid of
bezels) configured to address the aesthetic concerns were discussed
in reference to FIGS. 39, 40, 42-61 of U.S. 2010/0321758.
[0150] As another example, appearance of the front edge of the
assembly plays a special role in assuring that the user's
perception of the mirror is satisfying. Following the practical
consideration and the current trend in users' preferences in
appearance of the vehicular rearview assemblies, the edge of the
first substrate should be configured to be optically diffusive for
at least two reasons.
[0151] 1) In majority of cases, glass substrates of a mirror
element of a rearview assembly are produced through scribing and
breaking process that generally results in a reflective perimeter
edge having specular reflective properties and reflecting about 4
percent of the incident light. (It is understood that this
reflectivity level is inevitably increased if the specularly
reflecting edge is overcoated with a peripheral ring of material
such as Chrome.) The smooth specular reflective edge can give a
bright or shiny appearance to the glass edge in many ambient light
conditions, which is generally aesthetically objectionable.
[0152] 1) Moreover, if the edge of a mirror element is chipped or
cracked and is overcoated with a reflective peripheral ring of
spectral filter material (such as chromium, for example), the
chipping becomes extremely visible and stands out like a beacon
scattering incident light in all different directions. This
shortcoming becomes particularly aggravated if a chip or a crack
extends onto the perimeter of the first or second surface.
Similarly, if the perimeter and/or edge is chipped after the chrome
peripheral ring coating is applied, the chip visually stands out in
reflected light as a dark void on otherwise a smooth bright
surface.
[0153] It is appreciated that both the specularly reflecting edge
and imperfections associated with chipping of the edge of the
mirror element become especially problematic in embodiments having
either a narrow bezel or no bezel at all, because in such
embodiments the chipping are not concealed. At least for the
reasons discussed above it is preferred, therefore, to configure
the first substrate so as to improve both the mechanical quality
and the visual appearance of the edge of the mirror element in
order to produce a high quality mirror. Both of these goals may be
achieved by modifying the surface properties of the edge of the
first substrate. Required modifications are produced, for example,
by re-shaping the edge either after the coating has been applied to
the edge or, preferably, right after the mirror substrates are cut
to shape. Re-shaping may be performed by grinding, sanding, or
seaming the edge with flat or contoured wheels containing abrasive
particles or with a moving belt coated with abrasive particles.
Depending on a configuration of the carrier and whether or not a
bezel component extends onto the first surface of the mirror
element, a light edge treatment that removes as little as
0.005''--or as much as 0.010'' to 0.075''--of the front edge of the
first may be all that is necessary to achieve a desired result.
[0154] Abrasive materials include but are not limited to diamond,
silicon carbide or oxides of aluminum, cerium, zirconium and iron
in the size range of about 100 to 1200 mesh. The size of the
particles used affects the roughness of the finished glass edge.
The larger the abrasive particle the rougher the surface that is
created. Generally 80 to 120 mesh size abrasive particles produce a
very rough surface, 300 to 500 mesh size particles produce a smooth
surface and 600 mesh and above produce a near polished finish. The
abrasive particles can be embedded in a metal, resin or rubber
medium. An example of abrasives loaded in metal or resin binder are
diamond wheels available from GlassLine Corp., 28905 Glenwood Rd.,
Perrysburg, Ohio 43551 or Salem Corp., 5901 Gun Club Rd.,
Winston-Salem, N.C. 27103. An example of abrasives loaded in a
rubber binder are Cratex M or Cratex F wheels available from
Cratex/Brightboy Abrasives Co., 328 Encinitas Blvd. Suite 200,
Encinitas, Calif. 92024. Abrasive coated belts are available from
3M Corp., St. Paul, Minn. 55144. Modification of the surface
properties of the edge not only increases the mechanical durability
of the edge by removing the micro-cracks but also makes the edge
optically diffusive. The re-shaping is generally done in the
presence of a coolant to remove the heat generated during grinding
or seaming. The edge can also be reshaped by rubbing the glass
against a substrate flooded with an abrasive slurry loaded with
particles such as diamond, silicon carbide or oxides of aluminum,
cerium, zirconium and iron. Equipment for edge polishing using the
abrasive slurry method is available from SpeedFam Co., Kanagawa,
Japan. Alternatively, the edge can be reshaped by cutting or
blasting the edge with a high pressure liquid containing abrasive
particles of diamond, silicon carbide or oxides of aluminum,
cerium, zirconium and iron. Equipment for frosting glass using this
method is available from Bystronic, 185 Commerce Dr., Hauppauge,
N.Y. 11788. Alternative way of reshaping the edge may include
blasting the edge with abrasive particles of diamond, silicon
carbide or oxides of aluminum, cerium, zirconium and iron carried
by a high velocity gas stream. A modified glass edge can also be
produced by chemically etching the glass with a chemical solution
designed to leave a frosty surface such as Superfine Glass Frosting
Powder which a mixture of ammonium hydrogen fluoride and barium
sulfate that is mixed with HCl available from Above Glass Corp.,
18341 4.sup.th Ct., Miami, Fla. 33179. A modified glass edge can
also be produced by coating the glass edge with a diffuse or
pigmented paint such as 935 UV Series available from Ruco, Wood
Dale, Ill. or UV 420 Series available from Fluorital Italy, Italy
or Ultraglass UVGO Series available from Marabu, Germany or Crystal
GLS Series available from Sun Chemical, Parsippany, N.J. or
SpecTruLite UV Series available from Ferro Corp., Cleveland,
Ohio.
[0155] Discussion of solution to other practical problems posed by
addressing the aesthetics of appearance of vehicular rearview
assemblies is presented below.
Modifications, Auxiliary and Alternative Embodiments.
[0156] As discussed above and in Our Prior Applications, an
embodiment of a rearview mirror system employing an EC-element and
a source of light behind the EC-element preferably includes a ring
(peripheral ring) of an optical thin-film spectral filter material
that is circumferentially disposed in a peripheral area, next to a
corresponding perimeter-defining edge, of either the first or the
second surface of the system. It is recognized that the use of the
peripheral ring is partly directed to configuring an overall mirror
system in such a fashion as to make the system as aesthetically
appealing to the user as possible. For example, one purpose of this
thin-film ring is to hide the seal, the plug material, and,
possibly, the electrical connectors of the EC-element from being
visually discernable by the user through the first substrate. As
such, this peripheral ring of material is usually opaque in at
least a portion of visible spectrum of electromagnetic radiation
and may be sufficiently wide, up to 6.5 mm. It has also been
discussed in this application that such a peripheral ring must
facilitate matching of spectral characteristics of ambient light
reflected from the periphery of the mirror system that includes
such a ring with those of ambient light reflected from a central
area inside the periphery of the mirror system where the ring is
not present. The better the spectral matching, e.g., matching of
reflectance and color gamut, the less discernable is the area of
the peripheral ring to the viewer when the EC-element is switched
"off" and the rearview assembly of the invention operates purely as
a mirror. Solutions to achieving various degrees of spectral
matching between the ring-portion of the mirror and the central,
transflective portion of the mirror have already been discussed in
this application and included judicious thin-film designs of the
peripheral ring with the use of such materials as chromium, nickel,
stainless steel, molybdenum, silicon, platinum group metals,
aluminum, silver, copper, gold or various alloys of these
metals.
[0157] Also discussed was another, more tangible purpose of
utilizing a peripherally deposited thin-film ring--to reduce
exposure of the seal, disposed between the substrates forming an
EC-cavity, to UV light that causes degradation of the seal.
Clearly, then, such UV-protection measure is of particular
importance in an outside rearview assembly (see, e.g., FIGS. 3A,
3B, and 5) that is fully exposed to sunlight, while requirements to
UV-properties of a ring of an EC-element employed within an inside
rearview assembly (see, e.g., FIGS. 4 and 5) may be not as
stringent.
[0158] It is recognized that the use of a peripheral ring entails
certain shortcomings. For example, it must be realized that, in
operation, the peripheral area of a mirror system of the assembly
containing the peripheral ring does not darken, unlike the central
portion of the mirror, when the voltage is applied to the
electrodes of the EC-element (or other electrically darkening
technology) in order to reduce the light-glare blinding the user.
As a result, the difference in appearances of the peripheral ring
and the central portion of the mirror when the EC-element is "on"
may be quite significant, in particular in inside rearview
assemblies that typically employ higher reflectance levels.
Consequently, not only the size of the central portion of the
mirror is accordingly reduced, as compared to the overall front
surface of the mirror element, by a width of the peripheral ring
but the peripheral ring continues producing the undesired glare
even when the EC-element is "on". Another problem arises from the
fact that a typical mirror system of an inside rearview assembly
contains an eye-hole (such as the elements 497 and 515 of FIGS. 4
and 5) behind which corresponding sensors (such as the sensor 396
of FIG. 3A) may be positioned. When the eyehole is used in
combination with a peripheral ring, appropriate positioning of the
eye-hole may not be straightforward. For example, if the eye-hole
is formed by creating an opening in a coating stack of the third
surface, then locating such an opening within the peripheral area
of the mirror element will disrupt the visual continuity of the
mirror and will be perceived as aesthetically unpleasing,
particularly in an embodiment where the height of the mirror is not
significant. It is appreciated that, although in description of the
embodiments below mounting elements (e.g., carrier, bezel, and
housing elements) as well as electrical connectors are omitted, all
of these elements are implied and the described alternative and
modified embodiments may be used with any combination of the
mounting and electrical elements discussed in this application.
Eye-Hole Openings.
[0159] Common embodiments of automotive electrochromic mirrors
generally include light sensors for measuring glare and ambient
light levels. In certain embodiments the glare sensor is positioned
behind the EC mirror element and views glare light levels through
an aperture in the reflective coating. Prior art embodiments of
eyehole openings for light sensors comprise single continuous
openings. These openings in the reflective layer may comprise a TCO
or a transflective metal layer for conductivity. In general, these
openings can be several millimeters wide and are often round or
elliptical in shape. The aperture must be large enough to allow
glare light entering the vehicle to adequately illuminate the glare
sensor for accurate light level measurement. A single, hard edged
eyehole might be considered aesthetically less than optimum by
certain observers. Some prior art embodiments utilize a
transflective opening that is effectively stealthy and non-obvious
to an observer. For certain other embodiments discussed herein, the
use of a cluster of multiple, smaller openings instead one large
opening may have aesthetic and/or manufacturing advantages.
Non-limiting embodiments of multi-opening eyeholes are shown in
FIGS. 7(A-E). These examples comprise reflective regions 6620
(reflective material present) and areas 6610 that are patterned to
be essentially devoid of reflective material. As shown in FIGS.
7(A-E), these patterns may be essentially circular, rectangular or
line-like and may have a regular or irregular spacing. In general,
an optimized pattern of reflective and essentially non-reflective
regions within the geometric boundaries of an eyehole can be less
noticeable and therefore less aesthetically objectionable. The size
and spacing of the openings, as they contribute to percent open
area in the eyehole region, determine the transmittance of light to
the glare sensor. Because the eyehole is part of the EC element, it
darkens when the element is energized resulting in a change of
light intensity measured by the glare sensor. It is preferable that
the eyehole clear as quickly as the rest of the EC mirror element
so that the measured light intensity is accurately indicative of
the glare observed by the driver. If the eyehole clears slower than
the rest of the mirror element then it is possible that the EC
mirror will not respond to changing glare situations as
intended.
[0160] There can be negative impacts on EC mirror element
aesthetics and function caused by essentially non-conductive
regions of the electrode. In the currently described electrochromic
(EC) cell embodiments, the EC fluid comprises two primary coloring
compounds, an anodic material, which is bleached in its normal
state and becomes oxidized at the anode when the cell is energized,
and a cathodic material, which is bleached in its normal state and
becomes reduced at the cathode when the cell is energized. In one
embodiment the anodic material is yellow/green in its colored state
and the cathodic material is violet in its colored state. Because
these two EC materials are dissolved in the EC fluid, they are free
to diffuse through the cell. Therefore, when the operating
potential is applied between the anode and cathode, the two EC
active compounds proximate to the proper electrode surface are
converted to their colored states. The colored state compounds
diffuse away from the electrode surfaces where they were created
and are replaced by more bleached state compounds which are
subsequently colored. When a molecule of oxidized (colored) anodic
material diffuses proximate to a molecule of reduced (colored)
cathodic material, there is some probability that a charge transfer
reaction will occur, converting both molecules back into their
bleached state. A second potential route to bleaching of a colored
state molecule is diffusion to the opposite electrode from which it
was created. A molecule of anodic material that has been oxidized
at the anode has some probability of diffusing proximate to the
cathode surface. Once this occurs it is likely that the anodic
material will be reduced back to its bleached state. Likewise, the
same effect can apply to reduced cathodic material that diffuses to
the anode. In this way, some time after the initial activation of
the EC cell, steady state equilibrium is reached between the
creation of colored state compounds and the bleaching of colored
state compounds by intermolecular charge exchange and diffusion to
the opposite electrode. In the equilibrium state, colored EC
molecules have the highest probability of bleaching through
intermolecular charge transfer with the opposite species in a
depletion zone between the two electrodes where the concentration
of colored species approaches zero. As described elsewhere, in a
standard EC mirror cell design, surface 2 of the EC element
comprises a transparent electrode which is commonly configured as
the anode. Surface 3 of the EC element comprises a conductive,
reflective layer which is commonly configured as the cathode.
Considering the equilibrium described above, if one considers the
EC cell in cross-section, there will be a somewhat higher
concentration of colored anodic material proximate the anode
surface and a somewhat higher concentration of colored cathodic
material proximate the cathode surface. Nearer the center of the
cell (in cross-section), the concentrations of the colored anodic
and cathodic materials will be more similar until the
concentrations fall to near zero in the depletion zone. To an
observer viewing the reflective element from a position normal to
its first surface, the stratification of the colored species is not
apparent since the layered colors are blended by the path the light
takes to the observer. Consequently, if there is a gap in one of
the conductive layers generating a non-conductive or significantly
less conductive region (for example, an area 6610), a localized
imbalance can be caused in the equilibrium. The side of the cell
still having a functional electrode will generate colored material
as described above. The side of the cell with the compromised
electrode will not generate colored material or will do so at a
significantly reduced rate. Therefore if there is a gap in the
cathode of the above described embodiment, yellow/green material
will be produced at the anode without commensurate violet material
being product at the opposing cathode location. This imbalance can
lead to a net yellow/green appearance at the location of the
compromised cathode. This color imbalance is here and elsewhere
(U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,902,108 and 5,679,283 herein incorporated by
reference in their entirety) referred to as segregation. This
effect can lead to less than optimum aesthetics when the mirror
element has been in the dark state for several minutes. The size or
area of the compromised zone of the electrode affects the degree of
segregation due to its effect on the diffusion length required to
reach the other electrode. For example, in a non-compromised system
with two parallel electrodes separated by 140 microns, the shortest
diffusion path length at any position in the system must be less
than or equal to 140 microns. If a segment of an electrode 500
microns wide is removed then the shortest diffusion path length can
be as high as 287 microns in the compromised segment, describing
the hypotenuse of the triangle running from the center of the
compromised segment to its edge then across to the other electrode
of the EC cell. Increasing the shortest path length will increase
the effects of segregation. These effects are illustrated in FIG.
7F.
[0161] A common method of clearing the EC element involves removal
of the driving potential and electrical shorting of the anode to
the cathode. At this point no new EC molecules are being converted
to their colored states and diffusion takes over. The high
concentration of oxidized anodic species proximate the anode and
reduced cathodic species proximate the cathode result in a chemical
potential similar to a battery. Shorting the electrodes allows the
species proximate to the electrode surfaces to rapidly return to
their bleached state. Diffusion across the cell allows the
remaining oxidized anodic molecules to bleach through charge
transfer reactions with reduced cathodic molecules. Again, as
described above, a non- or partially-conductive area of one of the
electrodes means that the bleaching of one of the EC species cannot
occur at the compromised electrode surface resulting in diffusion
being the only route to bleaching. If only one electrode, cathode
or anode, is compromised then one species may bleach more quickly
than the other resulting in a color imbalance and slower than
normal clearing of that species which is herein also considered a
form of segregation. The sum effect of one electrode having a non-
or partially-conductive region is that in the driven (darkened)
state, one colored EC species increases in concentration in the
compromised zone, due to lack of depletion by the opposite EC
species, until it dominates the color. This dominate color persists
for some time after clearing of the EC element by the method
described above due to diffusion being the only route to bleaching
in the compromised region. Depending on the size and shape of the
compromised zone, it is possible, due to the chemical potential
present during clearing, to see a small amount of the violet color,
for the above described embodiment, proximate the perimeter of the
compromised zone during clearing. As described above, the colored
EC species persisting in the eyehole zone longer than the clearing
time for the rest of the element may lead to less than optimum
performance of the glare sensor.
[0162] As alluded to above, one route to minimizing the segregation
effects is to compromise both the anode and cathode electrodes. So
if the intent is to create openings or essentially non-conductive
zones in the third surface reflector layer to enhance transmission
or create a conductance break, creating an essentially equivalent
opening or essentially non-conductive zone in the opposing region
of the second surface conductive layer will have roughly
equivalent, offsetting effects, resulting in less segregation
effects. This is due to the effect that both electrodes are
compromised meaning that neither EC material effectively dominates
in the compromised zone. This may significantly reduce the color
bias in the activated (dark) state as well as during clearing. This
may also reduce the lag in clearing time but will not necessarily
eliminate it.
Examples
[0163] EC-mirror elements were fabricated with nominal cell spacing
of approximately 140 microns. The eyeholes in these devices were
configured by patterning the third surface metal reflector
(cathode) with vertical lines created by laser ablation in a
fashion similar to that of FIG. 7C. The perimeter of the ablated
area approximated an oval with a length of about 5 mm and a width
of about 7 mm. The width of the remaining metal traces and the
width of the ablated openings in the eyehole area are shown in
Table 1. Each of the samples was activated (darkened) for 10
minutes and then shorted (cleared). During the coloring and
clearing phases the eyehole region was observed by transmittance
spectroscopy to track the change in transmittance versus time.
Examples A1-L1 represent openings in the surface 3 reflective layer
without a corresponding "opening" in the surface 2 TCO. Examples
A2-L2 represent openings in surface 2 plus corresponding
essentially equivalent "openings" in the surface 2 TCO. FIG. 7G
demonstrates the change in transmittance at the eyehole during
coloring and clearing for both an element showing segregation
effects and an element not showing segregation. As can be seen from
FIG. 7G, a non-compromised EC element shows relatively monotonic
change between the bright and dark states while an EC element with
a compromised electrode in the region of the eyehole shows a
non-monotonic change both for coloring and clearing. The secondary,
slow change identified as segregation in FIG. 7G is due to the slow
diffusion of colored state EC molecules into and out of the
compromised zone/s of the eyehole. A time measure, t.sub.1, was
assigned for the time at which the primary rapid clearing step
transitioned to the slow segregation clearing step. A second time
measure, t.sub.2, was assigned to the point at which the clearing
reached essentially a steady state transmittance. The difference
between t.sub.2 and t.sub.1 was defined as the Clearing Time Delay,
Delta-t. The transmittance at time t.sub.1 was defined as %
T.sub.1. Similarly the transmittance at time t.sub.2 was defined as
% T.sub.2. The value of % T.sub.2 represents the transmittance of
the eyehole in its essentially fully clear state. The attenuation
of light at time t.sub.1 relative to t.sub.2 was defined as Delta-%
I which represents the loss of light intensity reaching the glare
sensor at time t.sub.1 relative to the intensity of light reaching
the glare sensor in the fully clear state; in other words, the
attenuation of the glare sensor response due to segregation. Table
1 lists the properties of the example surface 3 eyehole ablations
including whether surface 2 was also ablated, the width of the
metal traces, the width of the ablated spaces, the clear state
transmittance, the dark state transmittance and the variables
listed above. To minimize the effects of segregation on the
performance of the glare sensor it is preferable to minimize either
the clearing time delay, Delta-t, or the attenuation of the glare
sensor, Delta-% I. Minimizing both measures will result in a
preferable embodiment however; the minimization of either measure
reduces the impact of the other measure.
TABLE-US-00001 TABLE 1 Surf2 Traces Ablations Darkened t1 t2 Delta-
Label Ablation (um) (um) % Open % T % T sec sec Delta-t % T1 % T2 %
T Delta-% I A1 N 54 50 48 22.1 4.7 17 113 96 20.7 22.1 1.4 6.4 B1 N
123 50 29 14.1 2.7 13 68 55 13.6 14.1 0.5 3.9 C1 N 210 50 19 9.2
1.8 16 42 26 9.1 9.2 0.1 0.8 D1 N 81 75 48 23.6 7.5 20 130 110 21.2
23.6 2.4 10.2 E1 N 185 75 29 13.8 4.4 13 72 59 13.1 13.8 0.7 5.2 F1
N 315 75 19 10.1 3.4 16 50 34 9.8 10.1 0.3 2.8 J1 N 217 200 48 25.4
16.5 2 265 263 18.8 25.3 6.5 25.6 K1 N 490 200 29 16.1 10.5 3 164
161 12.2 16.0 3.8 23.6 L1 N 853 200 19 9.4 6.1 3 97 94 7.1 9.4 2.3
24.5 A2 Y 54 50 48 21.3 4.1 17 62 45 20.7 21.3 0.6 2.7 B2 Y 123 50
29 13.6 2.4 20 42 22 13.5 13.6 0.1 0.9 C2 Y 210 50 19 9.0 1.7 23 28
5 8.9 9.0 0.1 0.6 D2 Y 81 75 48 23.8 6.2 20 70 50 23.3 23.8 0.5 2.3
E2 Y 185 75 29 13.6 4.2 20 42 22 13.6 13.6 0.0 0.3 F2 Y 315 75 19
9.6 3.1 18 22 4 9.6 9.6 0.0 0.4 G2 Y 69 251 78 40.6 29.8 9 229 220
36.6 40.5 3.9 9.6 H2 Y 158 481 75 38.9 25.0 4 324 320 26.6 38.9
12.3 31.6 J2 Y 217 200 48 25.6 16.9 7 109 102 22.3 25.6 3.3 12.9 K2
Y 490 200 29 15.8 11.2 9 109 100 14.3 15.7 1.4 8.9 L2 Y 853 200 19
11.1 7.8 10 109 99 10.1 11.1 1.0 9.0
[0164] Another approach to quantifying the effects of segregation
on the glare sensor response is to consider the lag between
initiation of clearing the EC element and the time at which the
eyehole transmittance reaches a predetermined value. For this
purpose it is convenient to consider a normalized Percent Full
Scale (% FS) transmittance scale for the eyehole. The actual
transmittance of the eyehole at any time t is normalized and scaled
such that the minimum transmittance of the eyehole in the fully
darkened state becomes 0% FS and the maximum transmittance of the
eyehole in the fully cleared state becomes 100% FS. The behavior of
this measure for the clearing of selected examples is given in FIG.
7H. This normalized scale is convenient because it more accurately
describes the effects of the segregation on the actual response
range of the glare sensor. It is preferable that the eyehole reach
a % FS value of greater than 75% within 20 seconds of the
initiation of clearing. It is more preferable that the eyehole
reach a % FS value of greater than 80% within 20 seconds of the
initiation of clearing. It is most preferable that the eyehole
reach a % FS value of greater than 90% within 20 seconds of the
initiation of clearing. The Percent Full Scale transmittance data
for the examples described above is given in Table 2. Tuning of the
clearing speed and optical properties of the eyehole, as described
above, is controlled by the conductivity of the surface 2 and
surface 3 electrodes as well as the fraction open area in the
surface 3 electrode within the boundaries of the eyehole zone and
the selection of a metal trace (area 6620 of FIGS. 7A through 7E)
and open area (area 6610 of FIGS. 7A through 7E) dimensions and
geometry. It is therefore preferable that the fraction of open area
in the eyehole zone be between 5 and 75 percent. It is more
preferable that the fraction of open area in the eyehole zone be
between 10 and 60 percent. It is most preferable that the fraction
of open area in the eyehole zone be between 15 and 50 percent. It
is preferable that the minimum dimension of the metal traces be
between 1 and 1000 microns. It is more preferable that the minimum
dimension of the metal traces be between 10 and 500 microns. It is
most preferable that the minimum dimension of the metal traces be
between 20 and 250 microns. It is preferable that the maximum
dimension of the openings be between 1 and 1000 microns. It is more
preferable that the maximum dimension of the openings be between 10
and 500 microns. It is most preferable that the maximum dimension
of the openings be between 20 and 250 microns.
[0165] It is appreciated that the dimension of the remaining metal
traces (areas 6620) in the eyehole zone may affect the performance
of the glare sensor. If the traces are not small compared to the
dimensions of the glare sensor, or its optics, then the shadowing
of the sensor by the metal traces might result in the response of
the glare sensor being non-uniform with respect to the angle of
incidence of the light. For this reason the dimension and spacing
of the metal traces may require optimization beyond the
requirements of the segregation effects described above. Eyeholes
comprising multiple smaller apertures may be considered less
obtrusive and therefore more aesthetically pleasing than larger,
single aperture eyeholes. The use of laser ablation to form the
above described apertures/ablations is one example of a potential
manufacturing advantage over common methods used to generate
conductive, single aperture eyeholes in a reflective conductive
layer stack.
TABLE-US-00002 TABLE 2 Percent of Full Scale Transmittance. Time
(sec) % Tmin % Tmax 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 25 30 A1 4.7 22.1
0 0.5 3.6 11.0 20.7 44.7 57.7 70.4 81.9 89.1 89.8 89.6 89.7 89.9
90.3 B1 2.7 14.1 0 0.8 5.3 12.4 21.3 42.6 54.0 65.4 76.1 85.8 93.0
95.1 95.4 96.1 96.7 C1 1.8 9.2 0 1.0 5.9 13.5 22.9 44.6 56.0 66.9
76.9 85.6 92.8 98.3 98.7 99.1 99.4 D1 7.5 23.6 0 1.2 7.4 16.7 27.7
52.1 64.3 75.5 82.9 85.8 85.9 85.3 85.3 85.4 85.7 E1 4.4 13.8 0 1.6
7.9 17.1 27.8 50.7 62.2 72.9 82.1 88.5 91.5 92.0 92.2 92.8 93.4 F1
3.4 10.1 0 1.1 7.3 17.3 29.0 53.6 65.2 75.9 84.9 91.0 94.3 96.2
96.9 97.6 98.4 J1 16.6 25.4 0 10.3 19.9 24.2 26.6 28.5 30.2 31.5
32.7 33.9 34.8 38.3 40.5 41.8 42.8 K1 10.5 16.1 0 12.6 23.4 28.6
32.3 34.8 37.2 39.3 41.2 43.0 44.7 51.1 55.7 59.2 61.9 L1 6.1 9.4 0
12.7 23.5 29.4 33.5 36.7 39.4 42.0 44.4 47.3 49.2 57.5 64.0 69.2
74.0 A2 4.1 21.3 0 0.2 4.0 11.1 20.2 43.7 53.5 64.7 75.1 84.1 91.3
96.6 97.1 97.7 98.1 B2 2.4 13.6 0 0.3 3.2 8.9 16.3 34.5 44.5 54.6
64.2 73.1 80.9 98.9 99.3 99.6 99.8 C2 1.7 9.0 0 0.5 3.7 9.8 17.7
36.9 47.1 56.9 66.3 74.7 81.9 99.6 99.9 99.9 100.0 D2 6.2 23.8 0
0.6 4.3 10.5 18.2 35.5 44.7 53.9 62.8 71.2 78.9 97.0 97.2 97.6 98.0
E2 4.2 13.6 0 1.4 6.8 14.9 24.4 44.5 54.3 63.4 71.8 79.4 85.7 99.1
99.3 99.5 99.6 F2 3.1 9.6 0 1.2 6.1 14.1 23.6 44.1 54.0 63.5 71.9
79.5 85.7 99.0 99.6 99.6 99.9 G2 30.0 40.6 0 5.8 15.4 26.3 37.5
45.6 51.9 57.0 60.8 62.2 62.7 65.0 67.2 69.0 70.9 H2 25.1 38.9 0
3.3 6.3 8.5 10.2 11.4 12.7 14.0 15.4 16.7 18.1 25.4 33.2 41.1 49.0
J2 16.9 25.6 0 13.0 25.8 37.0 45.9 51.9 56.4 59.6 62.3 64.5 66.7
75.1 80.7 84.9 88.0 K2 11.2 15.8 0 7.0 17.4 28.6 39.2 46.7 53.7
59.4 64.0 67.3 69.1 74.3 78.2 81.6 84.1 L2 7.8 11.1 0 5.7 15.4 26.4
37.6 45.6 52.6 58.4 63.0 66.1 68.6 74.0 77.9 81.1 84.1
[0166] Another approach to making the eyehole less noticeable is to
locate at least part of the light sensor behind the peripheral ring
of spectral filter material and, correspondingly, the eye-hole
itself within the area defined by the width of the peripheral ring.
In such a configuration, the area where the reflector of the rear
substrate of the EC-element is removed to form an eye-hole will be
hidden from the viewer by the peripheral ring. This configuration,
however, requires the peripheral ring to be sufficiently
transmitting in the visible portion of the spectrum so that the
light sensor could function properly. It is understood, that
sufficient transmittance of a peripheral ring at a wavelength of
interest may be achieved by making the ring transflective as well
as by ablating a portion of the ring material or depositing the
ring with the use of masking means. A transmission level of 3% to
about 50% in visible light is preferred in such an application,
while in the UV portion of the spectrum the peripheral ring may
still be configured to remain opaque for protection of the seal and
plug materials.
[0167] Similarly, mutual positioning of the light sensor and the
associated eye-hole with respect to the seal is also important. For
example, if the seal material is essentially opaque in visible
light it should not obstruct the light that the sensor detects. On
the other hand, if the seal is sufficiently translucent, the sensor
can be placed behind the seal area and the associated eye-hole area
may overlap with the area occupied by the sealing material. The
combination of the seal and the spectral filter material should
have an overall visible light transmission of 3% to 50% for the
same reasons as described above.
[0168] Yet another approach to configuring the eye-hole area is to
simply position the light sensor behind a rear substrate with a
non-patterned reflector that is sufficiently transmissive (between
3% and 50%) as is. This level of light transmittance can be
obtained through the coating directly or with a combination of
light passing through the coating and through openings in the
coating.
[0169] To eliminate the requirement for an eye-hole altogether, the
light-glare sensor can be repositioned so that it is not screened
from the viewer by the EC-element. This type of construction is
known in the art. Often the eyehole is placed in an area just above
or below the mirror or anywhere along the periphery. The placement
of the light sensor could be in any number of locations including
in the mirror mount, in the headliner of the vehicle, near to or
attached to the rear window, on the side mirror, or on the rear of
the vehicle. The sensor could be a simple photo-optic sensor or a
more complex camera or multiple camera system.
[0170] Some drivers of vehicles equipped with an automatically
dimming mirror may not be aware that they have the dimming mirror
or, in some cases, they simply don't know when the device is
working. To some automobile manufacturers this reduces the value of
the mirror. At times indicator lights have been added to the
autodimming mirror to indicate that the device is powered. Still,
this indicator light does not demonstrate the function of the
device. In self-dimming mirrors comprising a reflective peripheral
ring, the darkening of the center of the mirror is highlighted by
the contrast to the reflective peripheral ring. Alternatively,
configuring the mirror to have an area that does not darken or that
darkens or clears at a different rate as compared to the remaining
portion of the mirror may also put the user on notice about the
operation of the auto-dimming mirror.
Reduction of Width of a Peripheral Ring.
[0171] Reduction of width of a peripheral ring may alleviate a
problem of residual glare produced by the non-dimming peripheral
area of the mirror even when the EC-element of the EC-mirror is
activated. If the ring is narrowed, then the total amount of light
reflected from it in the direction of the user is reduced.
Preferably, the width of the peripheral ring should be less than 4
mm, more preferably less than 3 mm, and most preferably less than 2
mm.
[0172] When the peripheral ring as narrow as 2 mm, a portion of the
wide seal may become visible from the front of the rearview
assembly. The visibility of the seal may be reduced or eliminated
if the seal is made of clear epoxy or a sealing material the color
and index of refraction of which match those of the EC-medium
sufficiently enough to remove the optical interface between the
seal and the EC-medium upon wetting. As a result, the "exposed" to
viewing portion of the seal will be effectively hidden from view in
the "clear" mode of the EC-element. When the EC-element operates in
the "dark" mode, the exposed portion of the seal just as the
peripheral ring itself will not color or dim, thereby improving the
appearance of the mirror element.
[0173] Alternatively, the reduction in width of the ring may
require an appropriate reduction of the width of the seal,
dimensions of a plug in the seal, and even dimensions of buss
contacts located behind and protected by the ring from UV-exposure,
especially in embodiments of an outside rearview mirror. The widths
of the seal, buss can be optimized as follows:
[0174] 1) Keeping the seal width to a minimum required to pass the
environmental durability tests;
[0175] 2) Judiciously selecting conductive buss materials
possessing such properties (of adhesion, low gas permeation, and
others) that would the buss to either function as part of the seal
or to simultaneously function as the buss and the seal;
[0176] 3) Use electrical contacting modalities and methods that
allow for incorporation of the electrical contacts within or under
the seal (nanoparticle inks based on silver, nickel, copper;
patterned metallic traces formed by metal deposition such as from
metallo-organic systems, electroplating, or electroless plating;
wire bonding of gold or aluminum wires or ribbons, as schematically
shown in FIG. 8A);
[0177] 4) Positioning the buss conductor primarily on the edge
surface of the mirror element;
[0178] 5) Optimizing or eliminating at least one of transverse
offsets between the substrates of the EC-element thereby providing
for extending position of the seal towards the outside edge of the
peripheral ring.
[0179] The plug area can be optimized as follows:
[0180] 1) Assuring that the size of the plug opening is no greater
than the width of the seal, thereby enabling a controlled injection
of a reduced amount of plug material;
[0181] 2) Appropriately shaping a plug opening 6710b, 6710c, 6710d
to assure that one dimension of the plug is greater than the width
6712b, 6712c, 6712d of the seal 6714b, 6714c, 6714d as shown in top
view of a substrate 6720 of an EC-element in FIGS. 8(B-D);
[0182] 3) Adhering a low-gas-permeability thin metal foil, plastic
foil, or glass/ceramic, or adhesive along the edge surface of the
EC-element or soldering metal to the edge surface to cover the
fill-port opening.
Rounded Ground Edge for Internal EC-Mirrors.
[0183] European regulations of automotive design require that a
non-recessed hard edge of any element have a radius of at least 2.5
mm, as a safety measure. (See, in particular, the U.N. Economic
Commission for Europe Vehicle Regulation No. 46, commonly referred
to as ECE Reg. 46). In response to such a requirement, a
non-recessed perimeter edge of an inside automotive mirror may be
covered with an appropriate bezel (and multiple embodiments of a
combination of a bezel with a mirror element have been discussed in
this application, e.g., in reference to FIGS. 42-54 and 58, 59 of
U.S. 2010/0321758). To satisfy the European regulations, a front
lip of a bezel extending over the perimeter edge of the mirror
element is designed with an outer radius of at least 2.5 mm. For
aesthetic reasons it is often desirable to either not have a
perimeter bezel or have a bezel that surrounds the perimeter edge
of the mirror and is substantially leveled with the front mirror
element. According to an embodiment of the invention, a mirror that
has an about 5-mm-wide peripheral ring covering the seal from
exposure to light (such as a chrome ring, for example) may be
devoid of a bezel that extends out onto the first surface of the
mirror. To meet the European edge design requirements and to be
substantially flush with the front surface of the mirror, the bezel
must be configured to have an at least 2.5 mm radius curvature,
which means that the overall transverse dimensions of the rearview
assembly as viewed from the front of it are at least 5 mm larger
than the transverse dimensions of the mirror element. Neither this
rounded bezel nor a peripheral ring contributes to the auto-dimming
reflective portion of the mirror and, together, the rounded bezel
and the ring add an at least 7.5 mm wide non-dimmable ring around
the mirror element. Moreover, the addition of a wide bezel also
detracts from the sleek appearance of the mirror assembly.
[0184] One bezel-less embodiment 6800 meeting the European edge
requirement and providing for a durable edge of the mirror is
schematically illustrated in FIG. 9. As shown, a mirror element
6701 includes a front substrate 6802 having a thickness of
t.gtoreq.2.5 mm and a rear substrate 6804 that are positioned in
spaced-apart and parallel relationship with respect to one another,
a seal 6806 disposed around the perimeter of the element 6801 so as
to sealably bond the front and rear substrates 6802, 6804 and to
form a cavity 6808 therebetween. A peripheral portion of the front
substrate 6802 is configured by, e.g., grinding to form a
curvature, around the front edge of the front surface 6802a, with a
radius Rad=2.5 mm or bigger. The rear substrate 6804 is smaller
than the front substrate 6802 and is transversely offset with
respect to the front substrate 6802 along most of the perimeter of
the mirror element 6801. As shown, a peripheral ring 6810 is
disposed circumferentially in a peripheral area of the second
surface of the element 6801 on top of a transparent TCO-electrode
6812 in such a fashion as to substantially block visible and/or UV
light incident onto the first surface 6802a from illuminating the
seal 6804. (It is appreciated, however, that in a related
embodiment the TCO-electrode can be deposited on top of the
peripheral ring, instead.) A generally multi-layer thin-film stack
6814, disposed on a third surface 6816, includes at least one
electrically conductive layer that is electrically extended over an
edge surface 6818 of the rear substrate 6804 to the back of the
element 6801 (as shown, a fourth surface 6820) through a conductive
section 6822. In a specific embodiment, a multi-layer thin-film
stack may be a reflective electrode at least one electrically
conductive layer of which is configured to be in electrically
communication with the back of the mirror element. Another buss
connection, 6824, provides for an electrical communication between
the transparent electrode 6812 and the fourth surface 6820. This
recessed back substrate design would provide for uninterrupted
electrical contact from the back of the embodiment to the front
and/or rear electrode(s). The mirror-holding system could be
designed such that the mirror element 6801 is supported by a
carrier 6830 having a judiciously formatted perimeter lip or wall
that is flush with an edge of the front glass substrate 6802 and
that covers the perimeter edge 6818 of the second glass substrate
6804 hiding it from view. A ground or frosted appearance on all
visible glass edges is aesthetically preferred.
[0185] It would be appreciated that the use of a front substrate
6804 that is at least 2.5 mm thick will increase the overall weight
of the mirror element 6801. Therefore, using glass plate that is
2.2 mm or less in thickness may be preferred. Using glass plate
that is 1.6 mm thick or thinner is most preferred. In such
preferred cases of thinner substrates, the edge surface of the
overall mirror element could be rounded to a radius of at least 2.5
mm to meet European specifications. It will be understood that a
process of rounding of the edge that modifies the shape of both the
front and the rear substrates of the EC-element results in making
either one of the electrodes or a clip, that provides for
electrical communications between the electrodes and the back of
the mirror element, visible from the front of the mirror
element.
[0186] One solution to this unexpected "visibility" problem, in
reference to FIG. 10A, is to configure the second substrate 6904 of
the mirror element 6906 with a recess or indentation 6908 in which
an electrical buss (clip of electrically conductive section) is fit
over the edge surface of the rear substrate 6904. FIG. 10B
demonstrates a front view of a stack of the first substrate 6910
and the second substrate 6904. FIG. 10C schematically shows the
rounded profile added to the edge surface of an assembled mirror
element in the area of the recess 6908. As shown, post assembly,
the recessed area 6908 of the substrate 6904 can be filled with a
material 6912 that simulates the look of ground glass, such as a
UV-curable acrylic resin filled with glass flakes. The assembled
mirror element is then shaped to a rounded profile, Rad, as
described above, around a perimeter of the mirror element.
Rounded Carrier/Bezel Edge.
[0187] Alternative solutions addressing the European requirements
of safety may be based on configuring a frame of the mirror without
a lip extending onto the first surface of the mirror and with a
rounded edge. Aesthetic requirements currently dictating a color
match between the rearview assembly and a vehicular dash board
would be met if the mirror frame had a metallic appearance. Several
embodiments implementing such solutions are schematically shown in
FIGS. 11A-13C.
[0188] As shown in a partial side view and a front view in FIGS.
11(A, B), an embodiment 7000 of a multi-piece frame construction of
the mirror element 7010 of the invention includes a carrier 7012
supporting the mirror element 7010 and attached to a housing 7014
and a bezel 7016 stamped of metal and attached to the carrier 7012
with adhesive. In a related embodiment, the metallic bezel 7016 may
be snapped or insert-molded into the carrier 7012. As shown, the
embodiment of the bezel 7016 has a front lip 7018 extending over
the first surface 7020 of the mirror element 7010. In a specific
embodiment, the bezel 7016 may be molded out of plastic and plated
with metal. It is appreciated that, generally, no peripheral ring
is required within the mirror element 7010 because a seal 7026 of
the mirror element is protected from light exposure by the lip
7018.
[0189] A partial side view and two different front views of an
alternative bezel-less embodiment 7100, 7100' of a mirror frame are
presented in FIGS. 12(A-C). As shown, a decorative inlay 7102 is
inserted into a front surface 7104 of a carrier 7106 having a
rounded bound, Rad.gtoreq.2.5 mm, that levels the front surface
7104 with the first surface 7108 of the mirror element 7110. In
this configuration, the frame 7100 does not obstruct the front
surface of the mirror element. The decorative inlay 7102 may be
stamped of metal or extruded from plastic and plated with metal,
and attached to the carrier 7106 with adhesive, by snapping, or
insert molding. It is appreciated that, to be used with this
embodiment of the frame, the mirror element should incorporate a
peripheral ring (not shown) to protect a seal 7126 from exposure to
light. The front views of FIGS. 12B and 12C illustrate,
respectively, that the inlay 7102 may or may not be present around
the entire perimeter of the mirror element 7110.
[0190] FIGS. 13(A-C) show, in side views and in front view, two
more alternative bezel-less embodiments 7200, 7200' satisfying the
European safety and aesthetic requirements. As shown in a
multi-piece embodiment 7200, a carrier plate 7202 has a front
surface 7204 rounded with a radius Rad.gtoreq.2.5 mm and leveled
with the front surface 7108 of the mirror element 7110. A
decorative insert 7212 of the embodiment 7200 is similar to the
insert 7102 if the embodiment 7100, but extends further towards the
housing 7014 of the assembly thereby providing for an uninterrupted
metallic appearance of the frame in the front view, FIG. 13C. A
specific single-piece embodiment 7200' of FIG. 13B provides for
metal-plating, painting, pad-printing or hydrographic decorating
7220 of the front surface of the carrier 7202 to assure the
metallic appearance in a front view of FIG. 13C.
[0191] Auxiliary embodiments of a multi-piece frame construction
that include a carrier supporting a mirror element from the back
and having an optically transparent bulbous peripheral part (which
is adjacent at least a portion of an edge surface of the mirror
element or even surrounds such portion around its entire perimeter
and that is devoid of any extension onto the first surface of the
mirror element), have been discussed in U.S. Provisional Patent
Application No. 61/392,119, which is incorporated herein by
reference.
User Interface.
[0192] As was discussed herein and in Our Prior Applications,
various operator interface elements including buttons have been
conventionally positioned in a housing or a mounting element that
wraps around the edge surface of the mirror system (such as a bezel
with a lip extending onto the first surface). To accommodate the
interface modalities, the mounting element has to possess
sufficient width. For example, a chin of the bezel containing
buttons and switches of the user interface typically has to be
wider than the remaining portion of the bezel including a lip that
extends onto the first surface of the mirror system. Some practical
systems, e.g., employ a bezel with a chin portion that may be as
wide as 20 mm. Incorporating of the user-interface components into
such wide mounting element causes several problems. Firstly, the
presence of a mounting element with mirror having a surface of a
given size increases the overall width of the rearview assembly by
the width of the mounting element, thereby blocking the front view
of the road to such a degree that a driver may experience
discomfort. Secondly, a risk of misplacing or tilting the rearview
assembly when pressing a mechanical user-interface button
positioned near the edge of the assembly, in the chin of the
mounting element, is increased, which causes the driver to restore
the rear field of view by manually re-adjusting the assembly.
Understandably, this re-adjustment may be a source of distraction
to a driver. In addition, disposing movable parts such as buttons
within the mounting element without additional precautions is
recognized to increase the level of noise such as rattling or
squeaking, which may reduce the driver's comfort on the road.
[0193] The first of the abovementioned problems, related to
increasing the effective area of the mirror system perceivable by
the user without necessarily increasing the overall size of the
rearview assembly, has been already discussed in this application.
Solutions proposed herein include the use of a lip-less bezel (or a
bezel with reduced width, or no bezel at all) in combination with
the use of a peripheral ring the visual appearance of which
satisfies the auto-manufacturer's requirements (e.g., substantially
matches the appearance of the central portion of the mirror, both
in terms of color and irradiance of reflected light; or has a
different aesthetics and/or provides a multi-band appearance). Such
"reduced bezel approach", however, begs a question of how to
re-configure the mirror system in order to not sacrifice any of the
interface and/or indicator modalities that have been conventionally
housed within the wide portion of the mounting element of the
mirror.
[0194] Embodiments of a user interface (UI) of a rearview assembly
addressing this question and discussed below can be enabled in
combination with any embodiment of the rearview assembly including
that employing a prismatic element; or that employing a peripheral
ring; and with any configuration of the mounting element (including
mounting with a bezel; bezel-less mounting; various embodiments of
a carrier, housing, or casing,) discussed elsewhere in this
application, in particular with those discussed in reference to
FIGS. 42-54 and 58, 59 of U.S. 2010/0321758 and FIGS. 9-13C and
3A-C of the present application. In particular, references made
specifically to EC-elements are made for convenience and
illustration purposes only: the scope of invention also includes
rearview assemblies employing prismatic elements or plane-parallel
mirror elements even if no corresponding drawings are provided.
[0195] According to embodiments discussed below, elements of the UI
include various functional elements such as switches, sensors, and
other actuators of the rearview assembly that may be operated with
no mechanical activation. Such switching elements or sensors are
activated by a user input that may include placing a driver's
finger in close proximity to the switching element or sensor.
Alternatively, the functional element is activated when the user
slightly touches on a component including the functional element in
question such as, for example, a conductive pad. In response to
such user input, the switching element activates, triggers, or
switches one of auxiliary devices that are located inside the
assembly and that may exchange visual or audio information with the
user. For example, an auxiliary device may be a display that forms
an image to be observed by the user through the mirror element of
the assembly. In another example, an auxiliary device may include a
voice activated system that will await for an audio input from the
user to perform a required operation.
[0196] In addition or alternatively, proposed implementations of
the UI facilitate reduction of size or, in specific embodiments,
even elimination of a rim-like portion of the mounting element
(and, in particular, a bezel that structurally supports the mirror
system) conventionally extending around the edge surface of the
mirror system of the invention. Embodiments of the user interface
of the invention include switches that are labeled, for
identification purposes only, as an optical switch, a capacitive
on-glass switch, a capacitive through-glass switch, a capacitive
in-glass switch, a capacitive glass-edge switch, a capacitive
through-bezel switch, a capacitive conductive bezel switch, a
conventional capacitive or a resistive touch-screen-based switch,
or a waveguide-based sensor. The terms "switch" and "sensor" in the
context of UI embodiments discussed herein are used
interchangeably. According to the embodiments discussed below,
either positioning the user's finger in proximity of a sensor or a
switch of an embodiment or a gentle touch on a sensing pad located
adjacent to the surface of the mirror system induces the rearview
assembly to activate a required function such as, e.g.,
illumination of a portion of a display, or dimming or clearing of
an electro-optic element of the assembly. Because the operation of
the user-interface embodiments of the invention may include
touching an area of the first surface of the mirror element, this
surface may be appropriately treated with a finger-print
dissipating (smudge-resistant) coating such as the Opcuity film
provided by Uni-Pixel Inc. (Clear View.TM.). If an input area is
configured outside of the primary reflective area of the mirror, a
matte finish and/or surface treatment resulting in textured surface
may be used to resist fingerprints. For example, a portion of the
peripheral area of the first glass surface corresponding to a
peripheral ring of the mirror may be roughened (via laser ablation,
for example) to produce a region that lacks specular reflective
characteristics and reflect incident light in a diffusive fashion
and has hazy appearance. Due to the surface structure, the
visibility of a fingerprint left by the user on such surface will
be reduced as compared to a glass surface characterized by specular
reflection.
[0197] In describing embodiments of a non-mechanically activated UI
of the invention, references are made to a legend, or indicia,
corresponding to a particular sensor, or a switch, or an actuator.
In this context, a legend refers to a physical marking or an
indication, disposed on one of the surfaces of an embodiment in
such a fashion as to be perceived to correspond to a given sensor
that provides identification of the given sensor and its function
to the user activating this sensor. Generally, a legend or its
equivalents may be configured in an opaque, transflective or
translucent layer deposited on or inserted into a surface (by,
e.g., masking out a portion of the layer during deposition or by
pre-molding an inlay that is further implanted into a component) to
form a required graphical or textual identifier that is
appropriately made visible to the user, from the front of the
assembly. For example, as will be discussed below, a legend may
configured in an overlay patch disposed on a first surface of the
mirror system or on a mounting element; in a thin-film stack of
either the second or third surfaces of the mirror system; or in a
surface of the mounting element that is visually accessible by the
user from the front of the assembly. According to present
embodiments, the most common way of causing a legend to be visible
is to highlight the legend with a source of light located behind
the legend with respect to the user. It is understood that even
when only a particular implementation of a legend is referred to in
a description of an embodiment, other appropriate implementations
are considered to be within the scope of the invention and are
implied.
[0198] Optical-switch-based embodiments of the user interface may
include at least one of a line-of-sight sensor (interrupter) and a
reflective sensor. FIGS. 14(A-C), e.g., illustrates an optical
interrupter that is employed in an interface of an embodiment 7300
of the rearview assembly and that includes an IR photodiode and an
LED pair (although multiple pairs may be present, corresponding to
multiple interrupters). A shown, an emitter 7302 and a receiver
(detector) 7304 form a line-of-sight sensor and are respectively
disposed in opposing (as shown, top and bottom) portions of a
mounting element 7310 that surrounds an edge surface 7312 a mirror
element 7314 and slightly protrudes over a first surface 7314a
toward an outside portion of the rearview assembly. In one
embodiment, the mounting element 7310 may be either a bezel or a
carrier of the mirror system supporting the system in the assembly.
When the user interrupts an optical connection established between
the emitter and detector and shown with an arrow (optical path)
7320 in FIG. 14B by placing a finger across this optical path, the
detector is caused to lose the reception of optical signal, which
in turn triggers the sensor's response to this user input. To
increase a signal-to-noise ratio of the embodiment and to reduce or
reject signal interference from ambient lighting, the operation of
the emitter 7302 may be modulated at a high frequency allowing the
detector 7304 to be AC-coupled.
[0199] A rearview assembly function to be initiated by the user
input through activation of the line-of-sight sensor 7302, 7304 may
be indicated with a use of a graphic- or text-based legend 7322
associated with a display of the rearview assembly and located,
e.g., within the boundaries of the mounting element 7310 on the
first surface 7314a of the mirror element 7314. (It is appreciated
that, in a related embodiment, when the rearview assembly contains
transflective coatings such legend may be appropriately formatted
in a coating disposed on either a second or a third surface, e.g.,
by judiciously masking a legend portion of the coating during the
deposition process). In a specific embodiment, the legend 7322 may
be made visible by backlighting when required. Backlighting of the
legend may be provided by a simple LED, optionally with appropriate
masking, or with the use of an illuminated LCD or an OLED-display
from behind the element 7314. Alternatively, the legend may be
incorporated in the assembly as a permanently visible graphic.
[0200] In one embodiment, the optical communication 7320 between
the emitter and detector of a line-of-sight sensor of the
embodiment 7300 is established through optical windows (not shown)
covering the emitter and detector. Such windows may be fabricated
from IR-grade transparent or translucent plastics that in the
visible portion of the spectrum are perceived as being almost black
and, therefore, may be color-matched with the dark mounting element
7310 to disguise the sensor areas. In a specific embodiment, the
emitter/detector pair(s) may also be mounted in the mounting
element in such a way as to provide a small gap near the glass that
is covered in front by IR-light-transmitting plastic.
Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 14C, the detector 7304' may be
disposed in the back of the mirror system 7314 and light pipes 7326
may be configured to deliver IR-light 7320 to the detector 7304'.
Similarly, in a related embodiment (not shown), the emitter 7302
may be disposed in the back of the mirror system, delivering light
towards the front of the mirror system via another light pipe.
Optionally, the hard edge of the mounting element 7310 may be
rounded, preferably with a radius Rad of at least 2.5 mm, as
illustrated in FIG. 14C and discussed in reference to FIGS.
11A-13C.
[0201] Although only a single emitter/detector pair is shown in
FIG. 14A, generally a plurality of such pairs may be employed. To
this end, FIG. 15 schematically illustrates a specific embodiment
including 3 line-of-sight sensors (3 pairs of emitters/detectors
(E1, D1), (E2, D2), and (E3, D3)). In such a multi-sensor case, a
process of identification of which line-of-sight among those
connecting the emitters and the detector is interrupted by the user
may be facilitated by operating the emitters E1, E2, and E3 in an
alternating fashion. In one embodiment, the emitters are turned
"on" one at a time. Once a given emitter is switched "on", all
receivers are tested for signal. Based on which light path is
blocked by the user's finger, six operational modes can be
identified, as shown in Table 3 corresponding to the embodiment of
FIG. 15. These modes allow the electronic circuitry of the rearview
assembly system to decide which light-path connecting which pair of
the emitter/detector has been blocked by a user (based on, e.g., a
look-up table) and, consequently, to activate a corresponding
function of the rearview assembly:
TABLE-US-00003 TABLE 3 Emitter/Detector (0 = blocked, 1 = signal)
E1/D1 E1/D2 E1/D3 E2/D1 E2/D2 E2/D3 E3/D1 E3/D2 E3/D3 Zone 0 0 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 3 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
1 4 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 5 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 6
An indicia or legend employed with this embodiment may be dynamic
and configured to be perceived as located on a surface of the
mirror element. For example, a legend may be formatted as an
options menu that is not highlighted from behind (not visible to
the user) during normal operation of the rearview assembly.
However, activation of a UI by any user input triggers highlighting
of the indicia. The highlighting of the indicia may also be enabled
automatically at vehicle ignition on. In various embodiments, the
indicia is configured with a bitmapped display, or with a segmented
displays or with masked backlit regions. Additionally, information
contained in the legend may also be expressed through brightness of
a legend-highlight or color (e.g., green or bright to indicate that
a function is enabled and red or dim to indicate that a function is
disabled).
[0202] An embodiment of user interface of the invention employing
optical reflective sensors operating in, e.g., IR-light is
schematically shown in FIG. 17. As shown, the emitters and
detectors of the "reflective" embodiments are disposed on the same
side of the mirror element, side-by-side. A group 7510 of emitters
disposed in the mounting element 7310 of the assembly, while a
group of detectors is positioned at a back portion of the mirror
element 7314 so as to be aligned with eye-hole openings 7512. The
sensor system of either embodiment is then triggered when light
emitted by an emitter reflects from the user's finger and is
detected by a detector of the group through an eye-hole opening.
The use of a visible-light reflective sensor instead of the
IR-light-based sensor may provide an additional advantage of
illuminating an area of interest for the user. In such an
embodiment, operation of the emitter may also be modulated at a
high frequency to increase a signal-to-noise ratio and reject
interference due to ambient light. To minimize direct coupling of
light from the emitter to the detector in the absence of the
triggering action by the user, an appropriate optical blocking
barrier (not shown) may be disposed between the emitter and the
detector. A legend (not shown) can be combined with an optical
opening (e.g., overlaid upon it or be formed in one of the
thin-film coatings that are internal to the EC-cell, as discussed
above) to convey the information about the purpose of a switch to
the user.
[0203] FIG. 17 illustrates an alternative embodiment 7600 operating
in a reflective mode that, in addition to detecting the user input,
is capable of providing positional information in a touch-type
sensor application with the use in a vehicular rearview assembly.
As shown, a pair of IR emitters E1, E2 is used in conjunction with
a single receiver D disposed between the emitters. It is understood
that lines-of-sight corresponding to the optical devices E1, E2,
and D are directed along the first surface 7314a of the mirror
element 7314. In operation, the emitters are alternately enabled,
and the user establishes optical connections between the emitters
and a detector by placing a finger ("reflector") in a proximity of
the detectors thereby reflecting portions of light, emanating from
each of the emitters, towards the detector. Resulting optical
signals are measured by the photodiode D. The ratio of the signals
associated with the emitters provides the system with positional
information about a location of the "reflector" (i.e., left or
right with respect to the detector D). The sum of the two signals
provides vertical position information. As a result, a rearview
assembly employing the embodiment 7600 is capable of sensing and
spatially resolving multiple positions, across the surface of the
mirror element, at which the user communicates with the user
interface of the assembly. At these positions, virtual "touching
pads" of a touch-screen sensor or switch may be deployed. A legend
for such a sensor can be provided in a fashion similar to that
described in reference to FIG. 15. In a specific embodiment, a
touch-sensor system such as that provided by the QuickSense product
line of the Silicon Labs (Austin, Tex.; www.siliconlabs.com) can be
used. Because the described system can resolve both X and Y
positional information, multiple user-interface options are
enabled. In one embodiment, virtual touch pads are configured with
the use of a programmable LCD or OLED-display located behind the
mirror element. Pressing these virtual touch pads causes the
activation of corresponding functions. The X/Y position information
can also be used to control a cursor, similar to that of a personal
computer. Tapping or pressing various regions of the display would
act like a mouse click on a computer. Dragging a finger across the
display surface can also act like a `drag` function, and is useful
for actions such as scrolling a map in a navigation display, or to
switch between menu pages.
[0204] Capacitive sensors that detect finger pressure applied to a
particular sensing pad are generally known. Various capacitive
sensors are available from the Silicon Labs, TouchSensor (Wheaton,
Ill.; www.touchsensor.com), AlSentis (Holland, Mich.;
www.alsentis.com), and Microchip (Chandler, Ariz.;
www.microchip.com). Some of capacitive sensors operate on the basis
of a field effect and are structured to include a conductive sensor
area surrounded with a conducting ring. Capacitive coupling between
these two conductors is increased when the user places his finger
in close proximity.
[0205] According to an alternative embodiment of the present
invention, a capacitive sensor of the user interface of the
rearview assembly is configured in an "on-glass" fashion and has a
sensing area, on the first surface of the mirror element, that is
in electrical communication with an electronic circuit board
disposed at the back of the assembly. (If multiple sensing areas
are present, these areas are electrically isolated from each
other). As shown in a cross-sectional view of in FIGS. 18(A, B), a
layer of electrically-conductive material 7702 forming a front
sensing area (or front sensing pad) is disposed on the first
surface 7314a of the mirror element 7314. The front conductive pad
7702 is electrically extended through a connector 7708 to the back
of the mirror element. In one embodiment, FIG. 18A, such electrical
extension assures a direct electrical connection with control
electronics on a PCB 7706, in which case the connector 7708 may be
a pin. An alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 18B employs an
electrically-conductive bridge 7710, fabricated of metal or
carbon-loaded ink, between the front conductive pad 7702 and a back
conductive pad 7712 positioned at the back of the mirror element
7314 (on the fourth surface of the mirror element or on a different
element in the back of the mirror). The back contact area 7712 can
then be further connected to the PCB 7706 by a spring contact or
other well-known contacting means 7716. In a specific embodiment, a
conductive elastomer may be used instead of the spring contact. It
has been unexpectedly discovered that configuring the back
conductive pad 7712 to have a smaller lateral extent than that of
the front conductive pad 7702 facilitates the increase of
signal-to-noise ratio of operating sensor by reducing offset
capacitance to the ground of the system. Therefore, in a preferred
embodiment the back conductive pad has a smaller lateral extent as
compared to the front conductive pad.
[0206] An alternative version of the front-to-back electrical
connection of a capacitive sensor may use a conductive adhesive
tape or a flex circuit leading from the first surface to the
controlling PCB. The top surface of the flex circuit could also
include the indicia, finger print resistant coatings, a metallic or
reflective cosmetic layer, and an insulating layer (such as a
non-conductive layer 7704) reducing a static spark during the
operation of the embodiment and increasing the electrostatic
discharge (ESD) tolerance of the system.
[0207] Suitable top conductive areas or pads may be produced by
metallic coatings manufactured with electroplating, vacuum
deposition, or adhesive-based conductors, metallic or carbon based
conductive inks. The electrically-conductive coatings may employ
copper nickel, stainless steel, or transparent coatings such as
ITO. Non-transparent coatings can be patterned in a way such as to
allow light form a backlight to pass through and illuminate the top
cosmetic overlay 7704 or a legend (not shown) that may include
information indicia for the convenience of the user. In the
alternative, the conductive pad 7702 itself may be patterned and
used as a legend for the corresponding switch. If desired,
conductors such as carbon ink can be used as an underlayment color
for a legend on the first surface of the mirror element. It is
appreciated that the hard edge of the mounting element (if present)
may be rounded, preferably with a radius Rad of at least 2.5 mm, as
discussed in reference to FIGS. 11A-13C. Alternatively, if
embodiments of FIGS. 18(A,B) are configured to be bezel-less, the
front glass component may be appropriately rounded in a fashion
similar to that discussed in reference to FIG. 9.
[0208] Embodiments of capacitive and field effect-based sensors for
use with embodiments of rearview assembly of the invention can also
be configured in a "through-the-glass" fashion. This requires that
the sensor area be not shielded by a conductive layer, or at least
that any present conductive shielding layer is small and
electrically isolated from other parts of the circuit. Several
alternative configurations of the invention employing a
through-the-glass capacitive or field-effect based sensor 7802 are
shown in FIGS. 19(A-C). FIG. 19A demonstrates an embodiment in
which the two substrates of an EC-element 7804 are not transversely
offset with respect to one another, while FIG. 19B shows an
embodiment with a transverse offset between the substrates of the
EC-element. Various mounting elements and housing, electrical
connectors, auxiliary thin-film coatings are not shown in FIGS.
19(A-C) for simplicity of illustrations.
[0209] As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, both a seal 7806 and
electrically-conductive coatings 7808 of the EC-element 7804 are
placed far enough inboard of the EC-element with respect to a seal
7806 to keep the EC-medium from shielding the front and back sensor
pads 7702, 7802 and/or providing electrical interference with its
operation. (Optionally, the transflective conductive coatings of
the EC-element may have external portions 7808' as shown in a
dashed line in FIG. 19A. A PCB or flex circuit is located at the
back side of the element. The front sensing pad 7702 may have an
insulating overlay and a legend (not shown) carried thereon, and
the circuitry may optionally contain LEDs to illuminate a touch pad
area (corresponding to the overlay 7704) employed by the user to
activate the sensor.
[0210] In comparison with FIGS. 19A and 19B, where the seal 7806 is
configured to be narrow and transversely offset with respect to the
sensor pads, the embodiment of FIG. 19C illustrates a situation
where the seal 7806' is configured to be wide and placed in the
area of the sensor (between the front and back conductive pads
7702, 7802). This embodiment may require a use of wide peripheral
ring configured to extend over the seal 7806'. Here, the seal is
made of material that is transparent or at least translucent at the
wavelengths of light used to backlight the indicia/legend on the
front of the mirror element through the mirror element. In
addition, the seal material can also be adapted to optically
diffuse light to provide for optically diffusive appearance of the
first surface indicia. "Through-the-glass" sensing embodiments of
user interface for use with rearview assembly additionally improve
the ESD protection of the sensor electronics. It is appreciated
that the hard edge of the mounting element (not shown) may be
rounded, preferably with a radius Rad of at least 2.5 mm, as
discussed in reference to FIGS. 11A-13C. Alternatively, if
embodiments of FIGS. 19(A,B) are configured to be bezel-less, the
front glass component may be appropriately rounded in a fashion
similar to that discussed in reference to FIG. 9.
[0211] In embodiments of the user interface of the present
invention that utilize capacitive "in-glass" based sensors, the
electrically conductive layers and connectors positioned internally
with respect to the EC-element are configured to serve as sensor
areas. In one embodiment, schematically shown in FIGS. 20(A, B), a
transparent electrode 7912 of the EC-element 7910 (located, as
discussed, on the second surface 7910b of the element) is
configured to have electrically independent portions 7912a, 7912b,
where the portion 7912a forms a sensing area. The reflective
electrode 7914 of the third surface of the EC-element is preferably
isolated into portions 7914a and 7914b, where the outer portion
7914a corresponds to the sensor area 7819 and is optional (as
indicated by a dashed line). When the two portions 7914a, 7914b are
electrically connected and form a single electrically-conductive
coating (not shown), it is preferred to keep the reflective
electrode at or near a ground potential. As shown, the seal 7916 is
appropriately positioned in-board with respect to the sensor area
7918 to prevent electrical interaction between the sensor area and
the electrochromic gel (not shown). In a related embodiment (not
shown), where the sealing material may be extended into the sensing
area 7918, the seal 7916 is configured to be translucent (either
clear or optically diffusing) to allow for backlighting of a legend
(not shown) corresponding to the sensor. (As in any of the user
interface embodiments discussed in this application, a legend may
be located on the first surface of the embodiment or,
alternatively, in a non-transparent inner layer of the EC-element,
or may be backlit by masking or programmable display.) FIG. 20B
illustrates a front view of the embodiment of FIG. 20A, where the
reflective electrode 7914 includes two portions--the outer portion
7914a corresponding to the sensor area 7918 and the inner portion
7914b corresponding to the central area of the mirror system of the
rearview assembly. The portions 7914a and 7914b are then
electrically isolated from one another with an isolation trench or
area 620c created in the reflective electrode as discussed
elsewhere herein. FIG. 20B schematically illustrates, in top view,
one possible way to dispose the seal 7916 around the electrical
connector 7920 submerged in epoxy 7922. In one embodiment, the
epoxy may be non-conductive. Although neither a mounting element
nor auxiliary electrical connectors have been shown in FIGS. 20(A,
B), it is appreciated that, in a specific embodiment, the mounting
element including a bezel may be present. In this case, the hard
edge of such mounting element is preferably rounded with a radius
Rad of at least 2.5 mm, as illustrated in FIG. 14C and discussed in
reference to FIGS. 11A-13C. Alternatively, if embodiments of FIGS.
19(A,B) are configured to be bezel-less, the edge of glass
component may be appropriately rounded in a fashion similar to that
discussed in reference to FIGS. 8A-8D.
[0212] In a capacitive glass-edge embodiment of the user interface
(not shown), spatially isolated electrically-conductive connectors
such as metallic tabs or conductive coatings are added to the edge
of the glass or on the inner surface of the mounting element. In a
specific embodiment, such a connector may extend inboard with
respect to the edge surface of the EC-element. The conductive epoxy
currently being used may be segmented, and separate segments are
then electrically contacted to the PCB.
[0213] A capacitive through-bezel type of interface sensor
embodiment, schematically shown in FIGS. 20(C, D), a flex circuit
or an electrical conductor 7930 is placed behind and underneath the
mounting element 7932 having a front lip 7934 extending onto the
first surface 7314a of the mirror EC-element 7314 and, preferably,
having a rounded profile with a radius of at least 2.5 mm. The
embodiment of the sensor or switch is activated when the user
touches a front pad 7940 configured on a front surface of the
mounting element 7932 to carry a legend or indicia. In another
embodiment, where several front pads 7940 are present that are made
electrically conductive, these pads separated by corresponding
non-conductive areas 7942. (If front pads are made electrically
conductive by appropriate deposition of an electrically conductive
film or by use of an electrically-conductive insert as described
elsewhere herein, the separating areas 7942 are made
non-conductive.) The flex circuit 7930 may have several extensions
behind the lip 7934, with each extension positioned to correspond
to a different front pad. Alternatively, several individual flex
circuits could be used for each of the sensors corresponding to
each of the front pads 7940. Flex circuit may optionally contain
the sensing electronics and LEDs. A leaf-spring contact 7946 to the
main board 7948 could be used instead of a wire to establish a
required electrical connection. It is appreciated that a sensor
legend (not shown) may be disposed on a surface of the front lip
7914 visible to the viewer 115, and the mounting element may be
made of translucent material, in which case the legend is
highlighted, e.g., by light channeled by the mounting element from
a light source (such as LED, not shown) at the back of the system.
In a related embodiment, the element 7930 may be a simple
contacting electrically-conductive layer such as a foil, a mesh, or
a thin-film layer establishing the electrical communication with
the main board at the back of the system. A related alternative
embodiment is schematically illustrated in FIG. 20E, where an
electrical conductor 7950 is disposed on the inner surface of a
lip-less mounting element 7932' substantially surrounding the edge
surface 7312 and partially extends to a front, outer surface 7952
of the mounting element A second electrical conductor 7954 such as
a leaf-spring is adapted to provide electrical connection between a
conductive pad (not shown) of a main board 7948 and the front
surface 7952 of the mounting element 7932'. In this embodiment, a
front pad 7940' carrying a legend may be configured on either both
the front surface 7952 of the mounting element and a peripheral
portion of the first surface 7314a of the mirror element 7314 as
shown, or, alternatively, only on the front surface 7952 of the
mounting element.
[0214] Another alternative embodiment of a component of a
user-interface sensor (such as a capacitive sensor or a field
sensor) of the invention operating as a switch for an auxiliary
device located inside the assembly is shown in cross-sectional and
front views in FIGS. 20F and 20G, where a plastic cap 7955,
providing a tray-like covering for a peripheral portion of the
mirror element 7314, is used to configure the component in issue.
An inner surface of the removable cap 7955, which is appropriately
sized to assure a close fitting around the edge surface 7312 of the
mirror element 7314 and is appropriately shaped to sufficiently
extend onto and both the first surface 7314a and over the back
7955a of the mirror element, is overlayed with an
electrically-conductive covering 7955b forming a thin-film layer, a
foil, or a mesh. In one embodiment, the inner surface of the cap
7955 is in physical contact with both the first surface 7314a and
the back of the mirror element. A front portion 7956 of the
covering 7955b corresponding to a front portion of the rearview
assembly acts as a front electrically-conductive pad of a sensing
element. A portion of the covering 7955b that wraps around the edge
surface 7312 to extend onto the back 7955a of the mirror element
establishes an electrical contact between the
electrically-conductive portion 7956 and a back conductive pad 7958
(such as a thin-film layer) disposed at the back of the mirror
element. The cap 7955 may be configured from a plate of translucent
plastic-based material bent so as to fit around the mirror element
of the rearview assembly and to allow for light channeling, within
the thickness of the cap, from a light source 7960 in the back of
the assembly towards an indicia/legend carried on an outer surface
7962 of the cap. The legend (not shown) may be disposed within the
surface 7962 (by imprinting, for example) or in a legend-layer 7964
carried on the surface 7962 so as to overlap with the pad 7956,
when viewed from the first surface 7314a. It is appreciated that a
front portion of the cap that extends over the first surface 7314a
provides the embodiment with a reliable ESD protection due to a
finite thickness of the cap, which may be anywhere from several
hundreds of microns to a few millimeters. In an embodiment having
several sensors, the electrically-conductive covering is adapted to
include several sub-coverings electrically insulated from one
another, along the inner surface of the cap 7950, with
non-conducting areas 7966. In operation, the cap 7955 is removably
put on over the edge surface of the mirror element.
[0215] In a "capacitive conductive bezel" type interface, an
embodiment of which is schematically shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, a
plastic mounting element 8002 (such as a carrier extending around
an edge surface of the mirror element 7314) having metallic
coating, deposited on a portion of the outer surface of the
mounting element 8002 and shown with a dashed line 8002', is
spatially segmented with electrically-isolated areas 8006 thereby
forming electrically conducting pad areas 8004 that the user will
touch to activate a corresponding switch. The mounting element 8002
may also be used as a combination element/PCB holder. The isolation
pattern 8006 may be defined by laser treatment, CNC, etching, or
masking during deposition of the pattern to separate pads
corresponding to different switches so as to provide for
independent electrical communication between each of the front pad
areas 8004 and a corresponding conductive pad (shown as 8008) on
the back of the mirror system. A rear electrical pad area 8008 can
be further electrically connected to a PCB 8010 through a spring or
an elastomeric contact 8012. For the convenience of the user, a
legend or other graphics (not shown) identifying a particular pad
and a corresponding switch can be incorporated by inscription into
the metallic coating 8002' in the area 8004. In this case, to
facilitate backlighting of the legend by an optional light source
8014 such as an LED disposed in the back of the mirror system, the
element 8002 may be made of transparent or translucent material.
Coupling of light from the source 8014 to the translucent mounting
element 8002 can be configured directly or with the use of an
auxiliary optical component (not shown), and the mounting element
will channel the coupled light towards the indicia at area 8004.
Alternatively, indicative graphics/legends can be placed on the
first surface (or formed in thin-film layers located within the
EC-element) adjacent to corresponding switch areas 8004, or backlit
by LCD or masked LED graphics. In addition, the conductive coating
8002' may be overcoated with a clear insulating coating layer to
protect the finish, or may alternatively be painted to color-match
the vehicle interior or some other components, as instructed by the
auto-manufacturer. In a specific embodiment the front conducting
areas 8004 of the mounting element 8002, a portion of which is
shown in FIG. 21C, can be configured as separate inlays 8010 that
are inserted within the mounting element 8002 in a fashion similar
to that described in reference to FIGS. 11A-13C.
[0216] In addition or alternatively, various already existing and
commercially used (e.g., in cell phones, PDAs, navigation systems)
capacitive or resistive touch screen systems may be used as part of
a user interface in a rearview assembly of the invention.
[0217] Various modifications of the embodiments are contemplated
within the scope of the invention so as to optimize the performance
of the user interface. For example, in any of the embodiments of a
mirror system that includes legend/graphics on the first surface
and a mounting element having a lip extending onto the first
surface, the mounting element may be raised slightly above the
glass surface so as to reduce or prevent the wearing off of the
graphics during handling (such as during loading into a shipping
box and rattling or vibrating in the box during shipment). For the
same reason, if a legend is placed onto a lip of a mounting
element, the legend may be recessed slightly into the surface of
the lip. In a different example, with any of the embodiments that
use capacitive or field effect sensors, an additional optical
emitter/detector pair may be used to detect that the user's finger
is approaching an interface. Such additional optical sensing pair
can act as a `gate` for the computer program product that enables
the capacitive or field effect sensors, thereby increasing the
sensitivity of the embodiment by rejecting spurious electrical
noise events that may occur during the time intervals when the user
is not using the interface. Increase in sensitivity of detection in
this way may facilitate the use of the user interface by a driver
wearing gloves, where otherwise the gloves reduce the electrical
effect that a finger would have on the sensor. In another
embodiment, an electronic circuitry of the rearview assembly may be
configured to utilize the increased sensitivity of a sensor in such
a fashion as to provide for a time-period, after the sensor of the
interface has been activated, during which the legend/indicia of
the sensor remains lit and visible. In a related embodiment, the
legend may be kept lit dimly (to minimize visual distraction of the
driver), but be illuminated more intensely when the driver's hand
is sensed to be reaching for the legend.
[0218] In one embodiment of the invention, an area of the first
surface corresponding to a virtual button of a switch (whether an
optical switch or a capacitive switch) of the UI of the embodiment
is appropriately adapted to enhance tactility associated with the
virtual button and to facilitate a touch-based identification of
the button's location. In particular, a region of the first surface
within a boundary corresponding to a virtual button is structured
to include a textured patch or a surface relief that can be easily
identified by touch on the background of the smooth surface of
glass surrounding the area of the textured patch or surface relief.
In a simple case, a region of the first surface corresponding to
the switch button can be simply roughened/ground (and, optionally,
coated with a colored layer), or textured with abrasive blasting or
laser ablation. A textured/roughened/ground area of glass
corresponding to a virtual button of a switch positioned in a
peripheral ring area of the mirror element (especially when the
thin-film coatings of the peripheral ring include metallic layers)
facilitates, on one hand, the reduction of glare experienced at
night in reflection of the peripheral portion of the mirror element
of the rearview assembly and, on the other hand, conceals
electrical contact associated with the button. In another example,
such a region can be carved out (or ground out, for example) to
form a recess or indentation in the glass surface that facilitates
a palpable sensation of presence of the button area. A boundary of
the carved-out area may be generally chosen to be of any desired
shape (such as circular, oval, rectangular, and the like). The
indented/recessed surface of the relief area can be either ground,
roughened or smooth. A like recess area can also be formed on a
second surface of the front substrate in an embodiment where the
legend of the switch button is positioned behind the second
surface. In this case it may be preferred to assure that the
recessed surface is smoothed or even polished: An effective lens
defined by the portions of the flat first surface and the recessed
(curved) second surface associated with the button area will
facilitate the visual perception of the button indicia/legend
located behind the curved second surface.
[0219] While direct electrical connections have been discussed in
reference to FIGS. 18A-21B, such direct connections are not always
required. A flexible conductor insulated on both sides can wrap
from the front surface to the back (similar to the on-glass
solutions above). Having both sides insulated allows a protective
cosmetic layer on the visible surface, but also allows the back
side of the conductor to avoid short circuits to the exposed
conductors at the edge of the element. A larger area spring contact
to the electronics can compensate for an indirect connection, as
this will form a capacitive coupling to the sensor.
[0220] In all optical or capacitive sensor based systems it is
preferred to have a direct feedback that the sensor has been
activated. Appropriate feedback can be provided for the user using
optical, audible, or haptic mechanisms. An optical feedback
mechanism may include a change of brightness or color of back-lit
indicator(s) associated with the activated sensing area of the user
interface. An audible feedback mechanism may employ a speaker or a
piezoelectric device as part of the rearview assembly, or a direct
connection or a network connection to an audio device already
present in the vehicle. A haptic feedback mechanism can
mechanically indicate (by, e.g., initiating a slight vibration of
the mirror using offset weight electric motors or an
electromagnetic actuator) to the user that a given function/device
has been activated. For example, a sensation of "friction" (tactile
feedback through electrovibration, haptic response) can be created
in an finger placed in a proximity of the surface, to simulate a
perception "touching" the surface via electrical pulses sent to the
conductive material of a switch pad. In one exemplary embodiment,
the conductive pad of a switch located on the first surface is
coated with an insulating material. By applying periodic voltage to
the conductive pad from a specific control circuit via
appropriately adapted electrical connectors, an effective
electrical charge is induced in a finger proximal to the conductive
pad. By changing the amplitude and/or the frequency of the applied
voltage, the surface of the insulating cover of the switch pad can
be made, without creating a mechanical vibration, to feel as though
it is bumpy, sticky, rough, or vibrating. It is appreciated that in
a related embodiment the control circuit can be adapted to supply
different driving set of voltage signals to different switch pads
to generate different sensations that respectively correspond to
switches of different rearview assembly functions that the user can
trigger.
[0221] In an embodiment employing a user interface of the invention
in conjunction with a mirror element having a rounded edge (such as
embodiments of FIGS. 9, 10A-C), the first surface overlay of the
user interface may be wrapped around the rounded edge of the mirror
element to create a continuous surface appearance. This may be done
with pad printing, or adhesive overlay. Electrical isolation among
the sensing areas of the embodiment discussed in reference to FIGS.
14A-21B should be equivalent to a resistive separation of at least
10 kOhms, and, preferably, 100 kOhms or greater. Levels of ESD,
measured according to industry standards, should be on the order of
at least several keV, for example 4 keV, preferably 15 keV, more
preferably 20 keV.
[0222] It will be appreciated that in another alternative
embodiment a sensing/switching element of the user interface of the
rearview assembly may be configured with the use of waveguide
optics. In particular, the first surface of the mirror element may
be appropriately overcoated with a slab waveguide layer 8102, as
shown schematically in FIG. 22, guiding the light coupled from a
light source 8104 through a coupling means 8106. The coupling means
8106 may be configured as any appropriate coupling means used in
waveguide optics (a diffractive element, for example). When an
external object 8110 such as a user's finger makes optical contact
with the surface of the waveguide layer 8102, the waveguiding is
frustrated and light leaks from the waveguide thereby scattering
around the point of contact. The scattered light is further
detected by an optical detector 8112 (an optical diode, CMOS or
other sensor). While light in different spectral regions can be
generally used for the purposes of the user interface in a rearview
assembly of the invention, a narrow band light source 8104
preferred to reduce potential interference with ambient light and
increase signal-to-noise ratio of the operating embodiment. Other
techniques, such as pulsing of the light source to differentiate a
touch response from ambient light levels through comparison of
source on, to source off detected light levels can be used to
actively correct for background and/or stray light and prevent
false responses.
[0223] Yet another alternative implementation (not shown) a
sensing/switching element may employ an acoustic wave source in
optional cooperation with an information display, as part of the
rearview assembly. In this acoustic-sensor implementation, a
display is positioned outside of the EC-cell of the mirror element
of the assembly and behind a glass substrate (as viewed from the
front of the assembly). Acoustic waves are transmitted from the
acoustic wave source across the surface of the glass substrate (or
through the glass substrate itself), and are absorbed by a finger
of the user placed in proximity to the glass surface. An electronic
controller that drives the acoustic wave source is configured to
determine coordinates of the "touch" across the display by
registering a change in the wave frequency at the touch location.
Advantages of this embodiment include unsusceptibility of the
performance of the switch to scratches and other damage of the
surfaces of the embodiment.
[0224] Another embodiment of the switching element may use force
sensing technology, where pressure from touching the surface of the
information display is registered by strain sensors mounted at
corners of a rigid piece of glass. The different strain levels
recorded by the sensors are used to determine touch location. By
identifying (with indicia) different virtual switch buttons at
different locations across the front surface, the force-sensing
switch can, therefore, be implemented with an embodiment of the
rearview assembly of the invention.
[0225] An embodiment of a resistive switch may also be used with an
embodiment of the invention. The resistive touch screen includes a
transparent, flexible membrane layer and a transparent static
layer. The flexible layer may contain polyester with a conductive
coating, while the static layer can be made of rigid polyester or
other rigid transparent material. When pressed (for example, with a
user's finger), the conductive coating effectuates ohmic contact
with a conductive coating on the static layer. Adhesives that keep
the layers aligned and in close proximity to one another are
located only on the periphery of the transparent area. However,
small insulator elements are interdispersed between the layers
across the display area to control actuation force and prevent the
layers from making contact when the screen is not being touched. It
is appreciated that a top layer of this structure is a continuous
film, which simplifies sealing of the structure against harsh
environmental conditions.
[0226] In fabrication of the above-discussed embodiments of the
user interface, a conductive capacitive or resistive switch pattern
can be fabricated on or in a pattern-carrier (that may be a
mounting element such as the element 7310 of FIG. 14A, for example,
or the surface of the mirror element) as follows: [0227] The
pattern carrier can be coated with a metal or conductive metal
oxide, sulfide, carbide or nitride by vacuum evaporation,
sputtering or other PVD processes. The pattern carrier can be
plated with metal. Metal containing or metalorganic inks can be
applied to the pattern carrier. A conductive polymer such as
polyanaline can be used to form the conductive pattern on or in the
pattern carrier. Other techniques for applying and patterning
conductive materials on substrates (such as those as described in
U.S. Patent Application Publication U.S. 2007/0201122 A1 that is
incorporated herein by reference in its entirety) may also be
applied. Conductive coatings can be applied in a pattern or
patterned or segmented in a secondary operation using a laser,
chemical etch, water jet, sand blasting or mechanical cutting,
milling or scoring. [0228] Conductive metal or conductive plastic
inserts can be molded or fashioned and then incorporated into the
molded mounting element during the injection molding process or
placed or pressed into or onto the mounting element after the
molding process. A two-step injection molding process could be used
with a first step involving molding of conductive portions of the
mounting element from electrically-conductive plastic and another
step involving molding non-conductive portions of the bezel using a
non-conductive plastic. A contact point that engages the switch
could also be a plastic or metal form or tape that contains the
switch conductor or pattern that is adhered to the mounting element
or a surface of the mirror element, preferably in a periphery of
the mirror substrate. [0229] A thin metal film, or metal tape, or
conductive resin could be affixed to the inside or outside surface
of the mounting element or the first surface of the mirror element
to form the switch contact point. Segmented conductive switch
patterns could be formatted on such a film or tape prior to
adhering it to the pattern carrier. [0230] A conductive paint such
as a graphite, carbon nanotube, or carbon black filled resin, or a
resin that is filled with a transparent or translucent conductive
metal oxide particle (antimony doped tin oxide, aluminum doped zinc
oxide, tin doped Indium oxide, indium oxide, zinc oxide or indium
zinc oxide, for example) can be used for form conductive switch
patterns on the surface of the pattern carrier. An opaque film such
as a carbon-loaded paint can be applied over a translucent or
transparent substrate and patterned to create an icon that could be
backlit by light illuminating such a substrate. The opaque paint or
film could be conductive, or, alternatively, the substrate could be
coated with a transparent conductive material such as a TCO
(transparent conductive oxide), a thin conductive polymer such as
polyanaline. In a specific embodiment, the substrate could be
filled with transparent conductive particles such as indium oxide,
indium tin oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, or low concentration
levels of carbon nanotubes or metal fibers or transparent particles
or fibers coated with a transparent conductive material such as
antimony doped tin oxide or indium tin oxide. [0231] In embodiment
employing a capacitive type switch, it is desirable to protect the
conductor and electronic circuitry from static discharge. Such
protection is provided by overcoating the conductor with an
insulating layer of plastic, ceramic, paint or lacquer or recessing
the conductor in such a way as to avoid contact with potential
static generating items (like the human hand or finger).
[0232] It is understood that at least one of the transparent and
reflective electrodes of surfaces II and III, respectively, could
be segmented or patterned with an icon/legend in an area
corresponding to the area of the conductive switch or sensor. A
peripheral ring could also be segmented and if desired patterned
with an icon with or with out a backlight into a conductive switch
contact area.
[0233] The icon and/or switch circuitry and/or backlight
illuminator can be entirely contained in and/or behind the mirror
element, in and/or behind the bezel element or a combination of the
bezel and mirror area. A flush bezel could extend a minimum of 2.5
mm around the perimeter of the mirror and still meet European
minimum edge radius requirements. A typical perimeter ring is about
5 mm wide. Unless the ring or the bezel is made wider in the switch
area, which may be aesthetically undesirable, a 2.5 mm or 5 mm
switch/icon area may not be easily discernable by the driver and a
2.5 mm or 5 mm touch landing pad area may be difficult to
accurately locate and touch. Combining both the bezel area and the
chrome ring area to enable an enlarged switch area for the icons,
backlight and circuitry enable a more user friendly and functional
switch system. The icon symbols and backlight could be positioned
in the mirror area and the bezel could have a continuation of the
icon, or the bezel could be a different color in the icon area
and/or the bezel could be raised in the icon area to enhance switch
location visibility and functionality. Since finger prints are more
readily visible on a smooth glass surface than on most bezel
surfaces, it may be desirable to attract direct finger contact
primarily to the bezel area. It is also desirable to cover the
contacted area of the bezel and/or glass area with an anti-finger
print layer or coating to avoid the visually objectionable
accumulation of dirt and finger oils.
User Interface: Mirror Elements with a Cut-Out Substrate Design and
with a Substantially Co-Extensive Substrates Design.
[0234] Implementation of UI in some cases may potentially present
problems with operation of EC-element-based rearview assemblies.
One of the problems that can easily escape attention is the problem
of electromagnetic interference caused by contemporaneous operation
of a capacitive switch of the UI and the EC-element, which
detrimentally affects the performance of the assembly as a whole.
To reduce or even eliminate such interference, some embodiments of
the present invention that utilize an EC-element may require the
use of appropriately and non-trivially reshaped optical elements
defining the EC-cavity.
[0235] One purpose of such reshaping is to spatially separate an
area occupied by a conductive pad of a switch of the UI from that
of the EC-portion of the EC-element such as to minimized
electromagnetic coupling between the two. To this end, a mirror
element may be configured such as to have the foot-print of the
switch and that of the EC medium onto the first surface of the
mirror element of the assembly not overlap. For example, an
embodiment of the invention may include an EC element having a
substrate that supports both an EC-cell and a conductive pad of a
switch, which is located adjacently and peripherally with respect
to the EC-cell, and another substrate cooperating with the first
substrate such as to establish a ledge extending along a portion of
the perimeter of the EC element. A portion of the ledge is used to
configure an embodiment of the switch of the UI of the invention
and to establish the associated electrical connections between the
components of the switch and an electrical circuitry at the back of
the EC-element.
[0236] FIGS. 32(A-C) schematically illustrate the above concept. As
shown in side view of FIG. 32A, a first substrate 9102 of the EC
element 9104 has larger area than a second substrate 9108, and the
two substrates 9102, 9108 in cooperation establish an EC cell 9110
and a ledge 9112 that is formed by a portion 9120 of the first
substrate that extends transversely beyond the geometrical
boundaries of the second substrate. As shown, the EC element 9104
has a first surface 9104a. FIGS. 32(B, C) offer two exemplary sets
of the first and second substrates of an EC element to illustrate
the way the substrates can be reshaped to achieve the cooperation
shown in FIG. 32A. The second substrate 9108' is reshaped by
carving out a portion 9124 (as compared to a fully-sized first
substrate 9102) to create a spatially-extended notch or recess.
FIG. 32B, on the other hand, illustrates an embodiment where the
second substrate 9108'' does not have any carved-out portion but
simply has a smaller area (or transverse extent) than that of the
first substrate 9102. As a result, when the first and second
substrates are spaced apart parallel to each other such that there
edge surfaces 9130 and 9132 are aligned, the corresponding ledge
portion 9112' (or 9112'') is formed. However, it is understood that
generally the second substrate may be smaller than the first
substrate and disposed such as to have at least a portion of an
edge of the second substrate be concealed by and is not observable
from behind the first substrate when viewed from the front of the
EC element and/or the front of the rearview assembly.
[0237] FIG. 33A demonstrates, in a cross-sectional view, a portion
9200 of a vehicular rearview assembly employing an embodiment 9104
of the EC element. As shown, the first substrate 9102 of the
element 9104 support the EC cell 9110, which is generally defined
by the first and second substrates and a seal 9204 disposed along
the perimeter of the cell 9110. The cell contains an EC medium 9206
in physical contact with a transparent electrically conductive
layer 9208 (such as a TCO) and a reflective thin-film stack
9210.
[0238] In further reference to FIGS. 32A and 33A it is appreciated
that, when the TCO layer 9208 is deposited across the second
surface 9104b of the EC element 9104 and unless additional masking
step is involved, the TCO layer is extended to the edge surface
9136 of the first substrate. To facilitate formation of a switch
element that is electromagnetically (and, in particular,
capacitively) decoupled from the EC cell 9110, as discussed below,
an electrical-isolation area 9208b is further established (e.g., by
removing a strip of the layer 9208 with laser ablation, or
mechanically, or via chemical etching) to electrically isolate a
portion 9208c, which is now spatially coordinated with the ledge
9112, from a portion 9208a. Additionally, the
electrically-conductive portion 9208c is characterized by a normal
projection, onto the second surface 9104b, that is adjacent to but
does not have any contact with a normal projection of the portion
9208a onto the same surface. (In an alternative embodiment (not
shown), a portion of the layer 9208 that corresponds to the areas
9208b and 9208c of FIG. 33A may be completely removed.)
Consequently, the capacitive coupling between the switch element
and the EC cell is minimized. As discussed in Our Prior
Applications, the transparent conductive layer portion 9208a is
further configured, by providing appropriate electrical connectors
(not shown) to be operable as a transparent conductive electrode
while the thin-film stack is adapted to be operable as a reflective
electrode of the EC cell 9110. The layer 9208 is shown to be
disposed on top of a peripheral ring 9214 (made of chromium and/or
other metals, as taught in Our Prior Application) which, in turn,
is configured to substantially conceal the seal 9204 from being
observable from the first surface 9104a. An alternative embodiment,
not shown, may include a transparent conductive layer 9208 disposed
under the peripheral ring 9214.
[0239] In further reference to FIG. 33A, the EC element (such as
the element 9104 of FIG. 32A) is supported, from the back, with a
carrier 9230, which is preferably made of a polymeric material and
has an extended portion 9230a positioned along a fourth surface
9232 of the EC element 9104. The carrier 9230 is appropriately
shaped to establish a step portion 9230b and a peripheral portion
9230c. The step portion 9230b integrally connects the extended
portion 9230a with the peripheral portion 9230c (in fact, it is
preferred that all three portions of the carrier are co-molded or
molded as a unit) and defines two surfaces: a step surface 9236,
which is generally parallel to the second surface 9104b, and a
surface 9238 that is generally transverse to the extended portion
9230a. The carrier 9230 is appropriately dimensioned with respect
to the size of the element 9112 to have the peripheral portion
9230c (i) accommodate the first substrate on the inboard side of
the peripheral portion and (ii) accommodate the second substrate
9108 on the inboard side of the surface 9238. The peripheral
portion 9230c may be configured to be optically clear, optically
diffusive (e.g., to have ground surface and, therefore, "frosted"
appearance), or have a colored appearance. The peripheral portion
9230c is additionally shaped such as to have its front surface
9230d curved, along the outer perimeter of the peripheral portion
9230c, with a radius of curvature Rad of no less than 2.5 mm. The
level to which the surface 9230d is spatially protruding with
respect to the expended portion 9230a may lie above or below the
glass surface 9104a.
[0240] In the embodiment 9200 of FIG. 33A, the surface 9236 is
shown to be a support for an electrically-conductive pad 9240
configured such as to have a normal projection, onto the second
surface 9104b, that is adjacent to but does not have any contact
with a normal projection of the portion 9208a onto the same
surface. Generally, the pad 9240 may be configured as an
electrically-conductive layer carried on the surface 9236, or,
alternatively, as a metallic plate, foil, or mesh juxtaposed with
that surface (e.g., with the optional use of a conductive adhesive
or conductive polymer as shown, in dashed line 9241, in embodiment
9250 of FIG. 33B, or by being simply placed in proximity to the
surface 9236). The pad 9240 is electrically extended, through a
passage 9242 in the step portion 9230b and with the use of an
electrical connector such as an electrical pin 9244 and a
(generally optional) contact pad 9246, to a circuitry for a
capacitive switch electronics (not shown) on the PCB 9248 (at the
back of the assembly) so as to define a capacitive switch of the
embodiment. The capacitive switch is adapted to operate in response
to a user input applied to the front of the assembly in the area of
the ledge 9112. The user input may include placing a finger in
proximity to or in contact with the first surface 9104a in the
region of the ledge 9112, which generally causes a change of
electrical potential associated with the pad 9240. The capacitive
switch circuitry at the back of the assembly is thereby triggered
to register a corresponding transfer of charge in response to which
a particular function of the assembly is activated. In an
alternative embodiment, such as an embodiment 9250 of FIG. 33B, the
electrical connection operably extending the pad 9240 to the PCB
9248 may utilize a different electrically-conductive connector 9252
using, to name just a few, a specifically designed metallic spring
contact, a "zebra"-strip, an electrically-conductive polymeric
material or adhesive that are configured to be compressible between
the conductive pad of the switch and the PCB. In an alternative
embodiment, where either a conductive epoxy or a combination of
wire and solder is used, no compression is required.
[0241] To present the user with an indication of a function/device,
of the assembly, that would be activated in response to a
particular user input (through operation of the capacitive switch
defined by the pad such as the pad 9240 or, generally, through
operation of any embodiment of a switch), an at least partially
opaque graphical layer 9254 that has icons or other graphical
indicia contained in it may be overlayed on top of or be juxtaposed
with the pad 9240. The information contained in such indicia is
delivered optically, through a region 9256 and through the
transparent ledge 9112 to the front of the assembly by providing a
backlighting arrangement for the indicia. In a specific embodiment,
the region 9256 may be at least partially filled with an
optically-transparent material (not shown) such as a polymer or
dielectric by depositing such a material on top of the graphical
layer 9240 prior to the attachment of the EC element to the
carrier. As shown schematically shown in FIG. 33A, the backlighting
system may include the use of a source of light such as a
single-color LED (or, if the indicia is multi-colored, a
multi-color LED source) 9130 that highlights the graphical layer
through an appropriate aperture created in the pad 9240. In an
alternative embodiment (not shown), the backlighting may utilize a
lightpipe element configured to optically couple a source of light
in the back of the assembly with the graphical layer. In yet
another embodiment (not shown), the backlighting flux can be
channeled to the graphical layer through the carrier itself a
portion of which, co-molded with the rest of the carrier, is
optically transmissive.
[0242] It is worth noting that in some embodiments a portion of the
electrically-conductive layer disposed on the second surface of the
EC element may be utilized as a conductive pad of the switch of the
invention. In addition, in a specific embodiment, graphical
information or code associated with an identified switch may be
contained within a pad of the switch itself. Such an example is
schematically shown in a cross-sectional view in FIG. 34, where a
TCO layer portion 9208c' (corresponding to the layer 9208a and
electrically-isolated from that layer, as discussed in reference to
FIG. 33A) may be used as a conductive pad of the capacitive switch.
In this case, the visual indicia may be incorporated onto or into
this layer and highlighted from the back, e.g. with light generated
by a (not shown) light source that is transmitted to the layer
9208c' directly through a channel 9310 configured in the carrier
9314 or, alternatively, through a lightpipe (not shown) that may be
reaching to the indicia through such channel 9310. When the
TCO-layer portion such as the portion 9208c of FIG. 33A or 9208c'
of FIG. 34 is used as a conductive pad of a capacitive switch of
the invention, the electrical connection is preferably provided to
the layer 9208c (9208c') through a channel 9312 appropriately
configured in the carrier 9314. The first substrate 9104 of the EC
element of FIG. 34 is adapted to be thicker than 2.5 mm and to
contain a region having a curvature with a radius Rad that is at
least 2.5 mm or larger. This curved region is circumferential with
respect to the first substrate and, therefore, presents itself as a
correspondingly curved annulus defining an edge region of the front
surface of the EC element 9320. (An element or a portion of an
element that has been shaped this way may be referred to herein as
Rad-curved or Rad-rounded, for simplicity.) An alternative example
is provided by FIG. 35A, showing a portion 9330 of an assembly
utilizing and embodiment of the EC element 9332, where a
TCO-portion 9208c' is configured to operate as an
optically-transparent conductive pad defining, in conjunction with
the connecting pin 9238 and the corresponding electronic circuitry
on the PCB 9248, a capacitive switch of the invention. However, in
comparison with FIG. 34, the indicia identifying the capacitive
switch is adapted in the graphical layer 9254 disposed, as
discussed in reference to FIGS. 33(A, B), on the step portion 9230b
of the carrier 9230. A source of light and optical system
facilitating backlighting of the graphical layer 9254 is not shown
for simplicity of illustration. In operation, once the graphical
layer 9254 is backlit, the indicia information is transmitted
optically, through the region 9256 and the ledge 9112 towards the
front of the assembly. Although not shown in the drawings, in a
modification to the embodiment of FIG. 35A the graphical layer 9254
may be disposed on the exposed surface of the portion 9208c'
instead, with an electrical connector 9238 being pressed against
the portion 9208c' through an aperture in the graphical layer. To
conceal at least one of the connector 9238, the edge along which
the surfaces 9236, 9238 intersect, and the gap 9338 between the
edge surface of the second substrate and the carrier from being
visible from the front of the assembly, a peripheral ring layer
9214 may be deposited on top of the TCO layer 9208 such as to
extend beyond the area corresponding to the seal 9204 and towards
the edge surface 9136 of the first substrate 9102, as shown in FIG.
35B. Further, the peripheral ring 9214 is judiciously ablated or
etched to outline electrically isolated portions 9214a, 9214c along
such a line as to create an elongated trench 9208b down to the
second surface 9102b that is devoid of any conductive material and
that defines a portion of ledge 9112 corresponding to the
TCO-portion 9208c (configured, in this embodiment, as a conductive
pad of the capacitive switch). The use of two areas of the
peripheral ring--9214a and 9214c--allows to relax the positioning
tolerances when affixing the EC-element to the carrier, because the
outboard portion 9214c conceals the electrical connector and the
passage 9242 through which this connector is inserted, and the
inboard portion 9214a the area of the gap 9338.
[0243] An alternative placement of the graphical layer and the
conductive pad of the capacitive switch is shown in FIG. 35C. Here,
an EC-element 9334 has first and second optical plates 9104, 9336
of substantially equal dimensions. However, the EC-cell 9110 is
configured to occupy only a portion of the substrates 9104, 9336,
leaving mutually-opposing elongated parallel regions of each
completely transparent, with only the TCO portion 9208c having been
formed on surface II. A combination 9340 of the graphical layer and
the conductive pad 9240 of the switch is juxtaposed with surface IV
(surface 9336b) of the EC element 9334. As shown in FIG. 35C, the
combination 9340 is configured to assure that the
electrically-conductive layer 9240 is electromagnetically decoupled
from the EC medium of the EC-element 9334. Specifically, the
foot-print (projection) of the layer 9240 and that of the EC-medium
of the EC-element 9334 onto surface II of the EC-element 9334 do
not overlap. As a result, the electromagnetic screening of the
layer 9240 by the EC-medium is minimized, as is the capacitive
coupling between them. The optical system providing backlighting
for the indicia in the graphical layer is not shown for simplicity
of illustration. An electrical connection between the conductive
pad 9240 and the switch circuitry on the PCB 9238 is configured
with the use of a two-sided interconnect 9342. When inserted into a
passage 9344, the interconnect 9342 is locked in its working
position, with the use of retention snaps (not shown), on either
side of the extended portion 9230a such as to have its element
spring-contacts 9348 to depress firmly into the switch pad 9240 and
the contact pad 9246 when the EC element is attached to the carrier
(the attachment means are not shown).
[0244] Embodiments of electrical and optical connections that
facilitate the operation of the assembly of the present invention
and establish corresponding to electrical and/or optical
communication(s) among its components and devices are discussed
elsewhere in this application.
[0245] Returning to FIGS. 33(A, B), the extended portion 9230a of
the carrier 9230 is firmly affixed to the fourth surface 9108b of
the EC element 9110 such as to mechanically hold and support the EC
element during the operation of the assembly (9200 or 9250). The
attachment between the extended portion and the fourth surface may
be implemented in a number of known ways, for example with an
adhesive or foam, 9258. It is appreciated that in any embodiment of
the invention, the carrier supporting the EC element is
appropriately configured such as to provide for necessary apertures
and openings facilitation various electrical and optical
communication between the electro-optics on the back side of the
carrier and the EC element and other active elements in front of
the carrier. A non-limiting example of the carrier is shown in FIG.
36 that corresponds to FIG. 37D of U.S. 2010/0321758, where some
structural characteristics of a carrier-embodiment have been
disclosed.
[0246] An embodiment of a PCB such as the PCB 9248 of FIGS. 33(A,B)
generally includes circuitry for at least dimming the EC medium
9206, driving LEDs for backlighting of graphical indicia, and
controlling capacitive switches, and may include throughout
openings or apertures facilitating light delivery from a light
emitter positioned behind the PCB towards the FOV at the front of
the assembly.
[0247] A portion of the alternative embodiment of the assembly
employing an EC element with a cut-out substrate design is
schematically shown in FIG. 37A to demonstrate a structure similar
to that of FIG. 33B but including a differently arranged
transparent electrode on surface II (second surface 9102b) of the
EC element. In particular, as shown, a peripheral ring 9402 is
deposited on top of the transparent electrically-conducting layer
9404 on surface II after which both layers 9402 and 9404 are
simultaneously laser ablated or etched to establish an area 9208b
devoid of these layers, thereby creating layer stacks 9402a, 9404a,
and 9402c, 9404c that are electrically isolated from one another.
Moreover, as shown, a peripheral ring portion 9402c is extending
onto the ledge 9112 and, therefore, at least partially overlaps
with a graphical layer (as viewed from the front of the assembly)
to conceal and block the edge of the graphical layer from being
viewed from the front of the assembly and to relax tolerance
requirements during the fabrication and component-alignment
processes.
[0248] In a specific embodiment, the portion 9402c of the
peripheral ring can extend towards the edge 9136 such as to
completely cover (not shown in FIG. 37A) the portion 9404c. In such
specific embodiment, at least the layer portion 9402c and,
optionally, both of the layer portions 9402c and 9494c are
patterned (e.g., with laser ablation) to create graphical indicia
therein that is backlit from the back of the assembly to make it
visually perceivable from the front of the assembly. To this end,
the PCB 9410, the extended portion 9230a of the carrier 9230, and
the adhesive 9258 are appropriately adapted to include
corresponding apertures or cut-outs that define channel(s) 9412,
through which an optical communication is established between a
light source 9416 at the back of the assembly, the graphics/indicia
layer(s), and the transflective portion of the EC element.
[0249] FIG. 37B illustrates a variation of the embodiment 9400, in
which the seal area is shown to include a non-conductive material
9452 disposed circumferentially, around the perimeter of the
EC-cell in direct contact with the EC-medium 9206, and a conductive
material 9454 disposed outside of the conductive material 9452. To
accommodate the presence of two materials 9452, 9454, the
peripheral ring portion 9402a of FIG. 37A is judiciously separated
into two sub-portions 9402a1, 9402a2 that are electrically-isolated
from one another by a non-conductive area 9456 (shown ablated
through both the peripheral ring material and the TCO material of
the layer 9404 against the area occupied by the non-conductive seal
material 9452). The conductive material 9454 electrically connects
the back of the assembly (as shown, the back of the EC-element,
surface 9108b) with the electrically-conductive portion 9404a2 of
the layer 9404 through the peripheral ring portion 9402a2 and a
conductive member 9458, which wraps around an edge of the substrate
9108. The member 9458 may be an electrically-conductive clip or
layer, foil, mesh or, in a specific embodiment, a thin-film
continuation of a layer that is part of the thin-film stack 9210
carried on the third surface 9108a. In a different area of the
EC-element (not shown), the layer 9210 may be similarly formatted
to establish an electrical connection between it and corresponding
electrical circuitry at the back of the assembly. Various
electrical arrangements serving this purposes were detailed in Our
Prior Applications, e.g. in U.S. 2010/0321758 and U.S. 2010/0020380
and will not be discussed here.
[0250] As was mentioned above, a smoothed outer peripheral edge of
the vehicular rearview assembly is dictated by considerations of
safety. While embodiments of the present invention discussed above
in reference to FIGS. 33(A,B), 35(A-C), 37(A,B) offer such
"smoothed" edge by curving the outer edge of the peripheral portion
of the carrier at a radius Rad of no less than 2.5 mm, an
alternative solution may be to curve the front perimeter edge of
the front substrate of the mirror element. This solution has been
already mentioned in reference to FIGS. 8A-D and 9. The embodiment
9500 of FIG. 38 expands on this idea and illustrates a portion of
the rearview assembly utilizing an EC-element 9502 with a cut-out
substrate design where the first substrate 9102 has an outer edge
curved, all the way along the perimeter of the substrate 9102, at a
radius Rad of no less than 2.5 mm. While it may be preferred to
have the first substrate as thick as 2.5 mm or even thicker, in a
specific embodiment a 1.6 mm thickness may suffice. In yet another
specific embodiment, the front edge 9504 of the carrier 9230 may
also be similarly rounded (not shown) with a radius of at least 2.5
mm. The electrical communication between the circuitry on PCB 9248
and the conductive pad 9240 of the capacitive switch is established
as discussed above, while the backlighting of the indicia in the
graphics layer 9254 is delivered from a source of light (not shown)
at the back of the assembly through a lightpipe or an optically
diffusive element (not shown), whether through the carrier 9230 or
along a portion of it, as schematically indicated with an arrow
9506.
[0251] It is worth noting that in embodiments having an additional
electrically-conductive layer in front of the conductive pad of the
capacitive switch, the effective capacitor formed by a combination
of i) the user's finger placed in the proximity of the front
surface region that corresponds to the conductive pad, ii) the
conductive pad itself, and iii) the additional
electrically-conductive layer in between--is a serial capacitor. In
such embodiments, as already mentioned in reference to FIG. 38, if
the additional electrically-conductive layer intervening between
the finger and the conductive pad of the switch has an area greater
than that of the conductive pad, the effective sensitivity of the
capacitive switch will be increased. Accordingly, embodiments
described in reference to FIGS. 33(A,B), 35C, 37A, 38, where the
TCO portion 9208c, 9208c', although optional, when present is
located in front of the conductive pad 9240 of the switch, it is
preferred to dimension the conductive pad 9240 to have smaller area
than that of the TCO portion 9208c, 9208c'. In a specific
embodiment (not shown), a conductive pad of the capacitive switch
may be disposed on the first surface of the mirror element such as
to optimize a response of the system to the user input.
[0252] Although most of the discussion in this application is
presented in reference to embodiments that utilize EC-based mirror
elements, a simple plane-parallel mirror element or a mirror
element utilizing a prismatic element can also be used without
limitation instead of the EC element in at least some of the
discussed embodiments. An example is provided in FIG. 39A, wherein
a mirror element 9604 (which may be configured to use either a
plane-parallel or a prismatically-shaped substrate) has an outer
edge region curved at a radius Rad of no less than 2.5 mm. Various
components including a capacitive-switch conducting pad 9240, a
conductive connector 9252, a graphics layer 9254 as well as an
optical system (not shown) providing backlighting of the indicia of
the graphics layer are similar to those discussed above. Another
example of a non-EC mirror utilizing a capacitive switch to
activate a designated function or device of the rearview assembly
is shown in FIGS. 39(B, C), where a conducting pad 9608 carried on
the first surface of the embodiment (in order to provide for a
stronger capacitance signal in response to the user input) is
electrically extended onto a second surface 9604b of the element
9604 through an electrical member 9608' along the Rad-rounded edge
surface of the element 9604. The graphics layer 9254 is disposed on
the surface 9604b either adjacently or adjoiningly to the extension
portion of the conducting pad and illuminated with light delivered
from the light source 9416 at the back of the assembly. As shown in
FIG. 39, the conductive pad 9608 and its extension 9608' include a
TCO layer. In an alternative embodiment, the pad 9608 and/or the
extension 9608' may include a metallic layer. (In this case, not
shown, it is preferred to incorporate the informative indicia in
the pad itself, such as by patterning the now-metallic pad 9608,
and by eliminating the graphics layer 9254). FIG. 39C offers a
schematic depiction of the front of the element 9604 of FIG. 39B,
and illustrates three electrically-isolated from one another pads
9608, 9608', 9608'' and the isolation areas 9610, 9612 between
these pads. The Rad-curved annulus along the edge surface of the
glass element 9604 can be ground or, optionally, polished prior to
deposition of the layer 9608'.
[0253] While embodiments discussed above in general reference to
FIGS. 33A-39C alluded to different sequences, in which a conductive
pad layer of the capacitive switch and an associated graphical
layer can be disposed with respect to the front of the assembly, it
is appreciated that a particular orientation of these two layers
provides potential advantages in manufacturing (including that of
cost reduction and scalability). Specifically, a configuration in
which the conductive pad of the capacitive switch is placed behind
the graphical layer (see, for example, FIGS. 33B, 37A, 38)
simplifies formation of internal electrical connections inside the
rearview assembly. In particular, establishing a connection between
the conductive pad and the PCB-circuitry for this configuration
does not require a formation of a passage through the graphical
layer towards the conductive pad (such as a passage in the layer
9254 through which the element 9244 connect the PCB 9248 and the
pad 9208c'.
Embodiments with a Composite First Substrate.
[0254] In order to satisfy the requirement of the ECE Regulation
46, mentioned elsewhere in this application, a mirror assembly has
to be tested with a reference ball-like test unit. Specifically,
according to paragraph 6.1.1.3 of the ECE Reg. 46, any surface in
"static contact with a sphere either 165 mm in diameter in the case
of an interior mirror or 100 mm in diameter in the case of an
exterior mirror, must have a radius of curvature `c` of not less
than 2.5 mm."
[0255] The use of a first substrate consisting of a single lite of
glass, such as that discussed above in reference to FIGS. 9, 10A-C,
34, 38, 39(A-C), may be an easy choice from the fabrication point
of view, but it presents an unexpected challenge to optimization of
operational characteristics of the related embodiments. The
challenge arrives once it's appreciated that a single-lite (or
single-pane) first substrate generally has to be at least 2.5 mm
thick or even thicker in order to form a substantially right
dihedral angle between the edge surface of the first substrate and
a surface behind it (such as the second surface of the first
substrate) while, at the same time, rounding the edge surface of
the first substrate with Rad. The right dihedral angle would assure
that the transition between these surfaces is fully differentiable
and that the above-mentioned requirement is satisfied.
[0256] While a lite of glass thinner than 2.5 mm can also be used,
some other part of the mirror assembly (like the carrier or the
housing shell/casing) will need to have a curved surface extending
beyond the perimeter of the glass lite, as viewed from the front,
in order to prevent the outside edge of the glass with an
incomplete radius from having an exposed edge. In some embodiments
of the invention, a 1.6 mm thick single lite of glass is used that
has its edge circumferentially ground at a 2.5 mm radius. In this
case the housing shell/carrier is shaped according to provide for
an overall external surface that is differentiable. Alternatively,
if a glass lite thicker than 2.5 mm is used, it is possible to meet
the 2.5 mm radius requirement and have the glass proud of the
carrier/hosing shell when viewed directly from the front.
[0257] The glass substrate thickness of at least 2.5 mm leads to at
least two shortcomings: on the one hand, the thicker the substrate
the heavier it is (which is generally unwanted) and, on the other
hand, a thicker first substrate reduces the sensitivity of a
capacitive switch the conductive pad of which is located on surface
II. The following exemplary embodiments are directed to solving
these problems without sacrificing the safety feature provided by
the Rad-curved peripheral edge of the first surface. The idea
behind the proposed solutions stems from appreciation that
configuring a composite first substrate (e.g., laminated from at
least two thin lites of glass) allows to preserve the curved edge
of an embodiment and, at the same time, to position a conductive
pad of the capacitive switch even closer to the first surface than,
e.g., in the embodiment of FIG. 38. In addition, a layer of
material intermediate to individual glass components that are being
laminated together facilitates keeping elements of such substrate
together even when the substrate is shattered, thereby increasing
the safety of the rearview assembly.
[0258] FIGS. 40(A-C) illustrate portions of composite first
substrates 9702, 9702', 9702'' for use in an embodiment of the
rearview assembly each of which is shown as a combination of two
lites, 9704a, 9704b where the lite 9704a is larger in size than the
lite 9704b and is preferably laminated to it such as a fashion as
to define a ledge 9706 formed by a portion of the front lite 9702a
that "overhangs" the second lite 9702b. Thickness of either lite
9702a, 9702b is such that the composite first substrate 9702,
9702', 9702'' has a thickness of at least 2.5 mm. A conductive pad
9708 corresponding to a capacitive switch of an embodiment is
disposed on a ledge surface facing away from the front of the
assembly and covers at portion of the ledge 9706 (FIG. 40C) or
extends all the way between edges of the lites 9702a, 9702b (FIGS.
40A, 40B). Although this conductive pad may include a metallic
layer, it is preferred that it include a layer of TCO and be,
therefore, optically transparent.
[0259] A peripheral portion of the ledge 9706 is shown to be
augmented (e.g., through lamination) with a plate 9710 of plastic
material that may additionally carry a graphics layer such as layer
9254 (FIGS. 37A, 37B). The thickness of the plate 9710 is chosen
such as to assure that the aggregate thickness of the ledge 9706
and the plate 9710 is no less than 2.5 mm. The source of light such
as the element 9416 of FIG. 37A illuminates the graphics layer 9254
from the back and transmits the indicia information towards the FOV
at the front of the assembly, through the conductive pad 9708 and
the ledge 9706. In the embodiment of FIG. 40C, the inboard-located
conductive pad 9708 may have the required indicia patterned therein
or have an additional graphics layer (not shown) to be attached to
the back surface of the pad. An electrical connection between the
conductive pad 9708 and corresponding electronic circuitry at the
back of the assembly is schematically indicated only in one
embodiment, for simplicity of illustration with a connector 9712.
Once the first lite 9702a has been built-up with a plastic portion
9710, a peripheral edge of the built-up ledge is further shaped
along the perimeter of the first lite 9704a, as discussed above, to
create a peripheral edge portion curved at a radius Rad of no less
than 2.5 mm.
[0260] FIG. 41, for example, offers a cross-sectional view of a
portion of yet another embodiment containing a composite first
substrate 9802, which includes first and second lites 9802a, 9802b
laminated with the use of intermediate lamination material 9802c
and which serves as a front optical substrate of an EC-element
9804. The first and second substrates, 9804, 9806 are dimensioned
so as to form a ledge 9806. In the area of the ledge 9806 there is
a front portion (as shown, a portion 9808c of a TCO-layer that is
electrically-isolated, with an area 9808b from an adjacent TCO
layer 9808a) of the capacitive-switch's conductive pad that is
laminated between the lites 9802a, 9802b. The composite substrate
9802 has a radius Rad of at least 2.5 mm around the perimeter of
this substrate. Otherwise, the EC-element 9804 is structured by
analogy with, e.g., the EC-element of FIG. 37A. The TCO-region
9404c, which is electrically isolated from the TCO-portion 9810a
representing the transparent electrically-conductive layer of the
EC-element 9802, is adapted to operate as an extension of the
conductive pad 9808c connected to it with an
electrically-connecting means 9812 (such as a metallic solid or
patterned film, a metallic clip, conductive ink or epoxy, to name
just a few) that extend along the Rad-rounded outer edge surface of
the composite substrate 9802. The overall conductive pad of the
capacitive switch of the embodiment, therefore, is wrapped around a
portion of the edge surface of the composite double-pane first
substrate 9802 of the EC-element 9804 such as to electrically
connect the portion 9808c of the inter-pane transparent conductive
layer with the portion 9810c of an electrically-conductive layer on
surface II.
[0261] Turning to FIG. 42 and in further reference to FIG. 41, a
schematic front view of the embodiment 9800 of FIG. 42 is shown
with the Rad-curved annular edge region 9904, corresponding to the
rounded edge surface of the first substrate 9802, and three regions
9906, 9908, 9910 that are defined by respective boundaries 9906',
9908', and 9910' corresponding to respective conductive pads (such
as the pad 9808c, for example). Here, the EC-element 9804 is shown
without any of the implied detail such as coatings or EC-medium.
Graphical indicia or graphic layer such as the layer 9240 of FIG.
941 is shown as a star, a triangle, and a circle.
Respectively-corresponding electrically-connecting means (such as
the means 9812 of FIG. 41), wrapping around the Rad-rounded edge
surface 9904 are shown as elements 9916, 9918, and 9920.
[0262] A variation of the embodiment of FIGS. 41 and 42 is
schematically depicted in FIGS. 43 and 44, where a combination
10004 of a conductive pad and a graphic layer is laminated between
the first and second lites 9802a, 9802b, which together form the
composite first substrate 9802 of the EC-element 9804, and is
further electrically extended, 9812, along the circumferentially
Rad-rounded perimeter edge of the substrate 9802 to a back of a
portion 10006 of the carrier of the invention. The back portion
10006, in turn, establishes an electrical connection (not shown)
between the electrical extension 9812 and the electronic circuitry
triggered by the user input applied through communication with the
conductive pad of the combination 10004. A single capacitive switch
is defined, in this case, by the conductive pad of the combination
10004, the corresponding electronic circuitry, and electrical
connections between the two. The front view of the embodiment, FIG.
44, illustrates three switches with corresponding conductive pads
extended 9812, 9812', 9812'' to the back of the carrier. In yet
another alternative embodiment (not shown) the electrical extension
of the conductive pad of the switch may wrap around the EC-element
to its back.
[0263] Modifications of the idea of a composite substrate discussed
above include a substrate veneered with a lite of glass having
dimensions that are substantially different from those of the
substrate itself. For example, a glass veneer that is larger than
the substrate can be laminated to a front surface of the substrate
such as to form a ledge between the veneer and the substrate,
thereby providing additional options for placing a conductive pad
of the capacitive switch. A "composite" approach to formatting the
first substrate of the embodiment may be advantageously used also
with a non-EC-element based vehicular mirror, as well as a
vehicular mirror assembly including an anisotropic polymeric film
allowing to optimize performance of the assembly operating in a
display mode, as discussed in details in Our Prior Applications,
e.g., in patent application Ser. Nos. 12/496,620, 12/629,757, and
12/774,721.
[0264] It is appreciated that in an embodiment where a
sandwich-like combination of the pad and graphical layer are
carried on a glass surface, such association may be formed by
"dry-transferring", as known in the art, of such combination onto a
pre-heated glass surface or via screen-printing onto the glass
surface.
Pairs of Substrates, Peripheral Rings, and Virtual Buttons
(Including Indicators of Operation)
[0265] FIG. 45 schematically illustrate that embodiments of an
EC-element having a ledge such as ledge 10220 defined by the first
and second substrates of the EC-element (as discussed in reference
to FIGS. 32A, 33(A,B), 34, 35(A,B), 37A, 38, 41, 43) or a similarly
configured EC-elements generally utilize a pair of optical
substrates such as a pair (A) of FIG. 45 or pair (B) of FIG. 45.
The pair (A) of FIG. 45, also labeled as 10201 and referred to
herein after as a "sized-down pair", includes a first substrate
10202 (whether made of a single lite substrate or a composite) and
a second substrate 10204 that is formed from a lite of glass
co-extensive with the substrate 10202 by removing a strip of glass
10206 thereby sizing this lite of glass down. The perimeter of the
second substrate 10204 is generally shorter than that of the first
substrate 10202. A second substrate 10210 of the pair 10207 of FIG.
45, referred to herein as a "notched pair", is formed from a lite
of glass initially co-extensive with the first substrate 10202 by
creating a notch (or a cut-out, or indentation) 10210. In addition,
while not shown in FIG. 45, the front edge of the first substrate
or both the first and second substrates may be rounded, Rad.
Moreover, in a specific embodiment it may be preferred to similarly
round the front edge of the carrier plate supporting the
EC-element, with a radius Rad' that is no less than 2.5 mm (see,
e.g., the description of FIG. 38). This may be done in addition or
alternatively to rounding an edge of a substrate of a mirror
element supported by the carrier, as discussed elsewhere in this
application.
[0266] A second-surface peripheral ring region(s) of the EC-element
in any embodiment of the assembly has to be judiciously adapted to
the choice of a pair of substrate defining the EC-element and the
choice of the embodiment of the conductive pad of the capacitive
switch and the graphics layer corresponding to this switch to
assure that its structure does facilitate the performance of all
the functions of the ring. Consequently, the peripheral ring
region(s) may include the ring itself (conventionally concealing
the seal, plug material, and electrical connectors of the EC
element, see, e.g., 9214 of FIG. 33A) and, in addition, may include
region(s) outside of the EC-element such as the region 9214 of FIG.
33B or a region utilized as a conductive pad of the capacitive
switch.
[0267] FIGS. 46A-47 schematically illustrate some of the possible
structure within the scope of the present invention. The front and
perspective view of FIGS. 46(A, B) show a combination of the
sized-down pair of EC-element substrates 10202, 10204 and a
peripheral ring region 10302 disposed on the second surface of the
EC element. The region 10302 includes a conventional peripheral
ring 10304 shaped such as to outline the perimeter of the
notched-back substrate 10204 and electrically isolated by
electrically-nonconductive areas 10306, individually and as a
group, "virtual button" regions 10308a, 10308b, 10308c. (The
peripheral ring region 10302 is disposed, in this case, on the
second surface of the EC-element.) Each of these regions is
independently electrically extended (not shown) to the appropriate
electronic circuitry on the PCB and is adapted to be a conductive
pad of a corresponding capacitive switch. In establishing
electrical connections between the conductive pads corresponding to
the virtual button regions and the electronic circuitry, in one
embodiment the pads are overcoated with a dielectric layer (not
shown) which, when viewed from the front, visually conceals the
isolation areas 10306 and prevents them from being observable. This
dielectric layer is further appropriately patterned to provide for
electrical passages to the conductive pads. In a specific
embodiment (not shown), the peripheral edge of at least one of the
first and second substrates of the sized-down pair 10202, 10210 of
FIG. 46C is Rad-rounded. Areas 10310 represent openings in
corresponding touch-pad regions of a peripheral ring-material
through which the indicia/icons corresponding to the touch-pads is
observable.
[0268] A front view of an embodiment of the rearview assembly
employing some of the elements of FIGS. 46(A, B, C) is shown in
FIG. 46D to be grouped together within a housing/casing (not shown)
and a carrier the Rad-rounded peripheral edge 10312 of which
surrounds the EC-element (compare, e.g., with the rounded edge of
the peripheral portion 9230c of FIG. 33A). The virtual button
regions 10314 are adapted to include either electrically-conductive
regions 10308(a-c) on surface II (in case the peripheral ring
regions are adapted according to the structure 10302) or separate
layer(s) of graphical applique (such as the layer 9254 of FIG. 33A,
for example) containing icons 10316. Therefore, the surface
associated with an individual pad region can be specularly
reflective, optically diffusive, or colored in a particular
fashion, whether opaquely or translucently.
[0269] Announcing to the user that a particular function or device
of the assembly has been activated in response to the user-input
applied to the virtual button, while allowing multiple
implementations, is not trivial because, on one hand, such
announcements should identify individual virtual buttons and/or
functions/devices and, on the other hand, they should be easily
observable by the user. To this end, the front of the assembly may
additionally configured include indicator(s) 10310 providing a
preferably optical output to the user.
[0270] Generally, embodiments of the invention contemplate numerous
lighting schemes (either for backlighting the applique, indicating
the switch has been activated or showing that a particular switch
is in use), including: [0271] 1. A "day/night lighting" mode, where
the intensity of the highlight may vary depending on whether it is
daytime or nighttime. An ambient light sensor and/or a glare light
sensor of the assembly can provide an output useful for such
control. [0272] 2. An "activation" mode, wherein, as described
above, lights may be useful to show that a switch has been
activated as outlined below. In this mode, arrangements include:
[0273] i. a given icon can be caused to flash and/or to change
color (especially easily if red, green and blue LEDs are combined
in a backlight). In such a case the color of the backlight may
change from any of these individual colors to any pre-determined
color by appropriately mixing the intensities of red/green/blue
backlights. Alternatively, [0274] ii. lit area may be separated
from a virtual button and remain "on" or flash [0275] through
transflective coating (whether a transflective region of the
peripheral ring or a transflective region of the
reflector/electrode); [0276] through secondary optic on the sensor,
or through a transparent or translucent portion of a housing
structure. [0277] iii. adjacent button indicate that a button is
hit [0278] iv. all virtual buttons can be lit or flash [0279] v.
while all virtual buttons flash, an active button remains "on"
[0280] vi. the use of a wide virtual button so lighting appears
around a finger [0281] vii. a center backlight to light the icon
and an edge light to light the rest of the button when user input
is applied.
[0282] In particular, in reference to FIGS. 46(E-J), the
indicator(s) may be disposed, e.g.: [0283] in the viewable area of
the mirror such as above the region of the peripheral ring, FIG.
46E, or in the upper portion of the mirror such as in the area of
an eye-hole corresponding to a glare sensor, FIG. 46G; [0284] in
the areas of isolation between neighboring virtual buttons, FIG.
46F; [0285] within the boundaries of a virtual button, FIG. 46H and
FIG. 46J; [0286] within a portion of the housing structure (e.g.,
in a peripheral portion of the carrier, FIG. 46I). [0287] FIG. 53
schematically additionally illustrates positioning of optical
indicators for capacitive switches.
[0288] In reference to FIG. 46G, where the optical indicator such
as an LED shares an eye-hole opening with the glare sensor to
deliver the capacitive-switch-activation feedback signal to the
user, the operation of the glare sensor and the indicator is
preferably temporally coordinated. As the microprocessor controls
the indicator 10310 and the glare-sensor timing, the most recent
glare-sensor data is saved and its activity is suspended while the
optical indicator 10310 is "on". When the indicator is disabled,
however, the activity of the glare sensor is resumed to provide
current, live glare sensor data. Alternatively or in addition, if
the operation of the glare sensor can be sampled as a fast enough
rate, the optical indicator can be pulse-width modulated (e.g., be
"on" 90% of the time) and readings of the glare sensor can be
acquired during the "off" time of the optical indicator. In this
case, care should be taken to consider rise and fall times of the
optical indicator's electronic drive.
[0289] Continuing the discussion of differently dimensioned optical
substrates, FIG. 47 corresponds to the assembly that utilizes the
sized-down pair of substrates 10202, 10210 and a peripheral ring
10402, a widened portion of which extends to the ledge of the
EC-element and is configured to operate as a graphics/indicia
layer. A front view of a similar embodiment that utilizes a notched
pair of substrates 10202, 10210 is illustrated in FIG. 48.
[0290] Referring to FIGS. 45 and 46(A-D), in one exemplary
embodiment the height of the touch-pad regions 10314 may be about
10 mm to about 13 mm, with roundish icons 10316 of about 6.5 to 7
mm in diameter. The peripheral ring 10304 has a width of about 4.5
mm anywhere except in the area 10320 above the touch-pads, where it
is generally wide (e.g., 5.5 mm). In another exemplary embodiment
that utilizes a combination of elements of FIG. 48, the peripheral
ring 10402 may have a width of about 4.5 mm everywhere except in
the graphics area 10504, where it is judiciously configured to be
so dimensioned as to conceal the area of the notch 10212 in the
second substrate 10210, which corresponds to the ledge of the
EC-element, from being observable from the front of the
assembly.
[0291] FIGS. 56(A, B) provide additional description of the
EC-element construction by illustrating some key components and
omitting the rest of otherwise present elements for simplicity of
illustration. The structure of FIG. 56A generally corresponds to an
embodiment employing either a sized-down pair of substrates or a
notched pair of substrates and a peripheral ring layer having a
single ring with a "notch" region such as the ring 10304 of FIG.
46C, with a notch region 10320. The structure of FIG. 56B generally
corresponds to an embodiment employing a notched pair of substrates
and a peripheral ring layer that has either a single peripheral
ring that is widened in the notch region (such as the ring 10402 of
FIG. 47) or a peripheral ring together with peripheral virtual
button regions (such the embodiment 10302 of FIGS. 46A, 46B). Here,
11302 is the first substrate of the EC-element; 10304 is its second
substrate; 11308, 11308a and 11308' are the corresponding
peripheral ring layers; 11312 is the icon/graphics layer, while
11312' may combine the graphics layer and the
electrically-conductive layer; 11316 is the layer of opaque
applique; 11320 indicate circuit traces and/or the conductive pad
for a capacitive switch. As discussed in reference to FIG. 35B, a
portion 11308a of the peripheral ring layer is shown to have a
projection, onto the first surface 11302a of the EC element, that
overlaps with a corresponding projection of the applique layer
11316 in order to aid in alignment of EC-element components during
the fabrication. While some dimensions are indicated in FIGS. 56(A,
B), these dimensions are exemplary and may vary in different
embodiments.
Specific Embodiments Facilitating Backlighting and Highlight of
Indicia.
[0292] As shown in an exploded view of FIG. 49, the integration of
optical substrates in an assembly may be carried out through
cooperation among the housing shell or casing 10602, defining an
aperture 10604 towards the front of the assembly, and a carrier
10606. The carrier 10606 is shown to include the extended portion
10606a, configured to support the notched pair 10207 from behind,
and a peripheral portion 10606c (with an Rad-rounded outer edge)
configured to peripherally surround the pair 10207, as discussed in
reference to FIG. 37A, for example. Both the carrier 10606 and the
housing shell/casing 10602 are shown to include various throughout
openings and passages 10610 adapted to accommodate electrical and
mechanical connectors, optical elements and other components of the
rearview assembly.
[0293] FIG. 50A shows, at a different angle, a complementary
exploded view of the carrier 10606, the notched substrate pair
10207, the peripheral ring region 10710 (such as, e.g., the ring
region 10504 of FIG. 48 or the region 10302 of FIG. 46A) between
the substrates 10202, 10210, and a specific embodiment of a
structure 10716 dedicated to facilitate delivery of light from a
source of light (not shown) at the back of the assembly to the
indicia layer (not shown) at the front of the assembly). Generally,
with respect to backlighting of indicia and indicators of the
virtual buttons corresponding to capacitive switches of the
invention, light sources such as LEDs can be placed directly behind
an area to be lit, and may utilize optical systems including
lightpipes, diffusers, lenses etc. The embodiment of the shown
structure 10716 includes an array 10720 of lightpipes and a
lightpipe support 10724, which are further detailed in reference to
FIGS. 50(B-D).
[0294] A front view of the carrier 10606 with the structure 10716
(including the array 10720 of lightpipes 10720a, 10720b, 10720c and
the lightpipe support 10724) is illustrated in FIG. 50B. The number
of lightpipes in an array of lightpipes generally corresponds to
the number of the pad regions of the first substrate of the
embodiment (such as regions 10314 of FIG. 46D) and to the number of
indicia regions (such as regions 10316 of FIG. 46D) of the
functional capacitive switches of a given embodiment. A lightpipe
such as a transparent-plastic lightpipe 10720a, for example, has an
input end 10730 and an output end. An input end of any of the
lightpipes 10720(a, b, c) optically communicates with a light
source such as an LED, OLED, an incandescent or electroluminescent
source of light at the back of the assembly. An output end is
judiciously structured such as to deliver light channeled through
the corresponding lightpipe to the virtual-button indicators 10310.
For example, the output end 10732 is shaped as a dove-tail to mate
with the optical indicator embodiment of FIG. 46H or 46J and
includes an opening 10734 for transmitting light from another LED
through an aperture 10736 of the lightpipe support 10724 towards
the icon 10316 of the assembly. In addition, the input end 10732
includes a foot 10738 angled with respect to a body 10740 of the
lightpipe 10724a, 10724b, 10724c that facilitates a snap-on
removable attachment between the lightpipe support 10724 and the
lightpipe 10724a, 10724b, 10724c as shown in a cross-sectional view
of FIG. 50C. A bridge 10742 of the support 10724 is dimensioned to
fit within a cut-out opening 10610 at the bottom of the extended
portion 10606a of the carrier 10606.
User Interface: Embodiments Incorporating a Lock-Out Switch.
[0295] The basic idea behind a "lock-out switch" stems from the
realization that at least one of the "functional" switches (such as
capacitive or optical switches) of an embodiment of a rearview
assembly that are designed to respond to a user input from the
front of the assembly (e.g., the one coordinated with a portion of
the first surface, such as brushing or juxtaposing one's finger
against it) is likely to be unintentionally triggered when the user
tilts and turns the assembly affixed to the front windshield in
order to adjust the viewing angle. In order to effectuate the
adjustment of the mirror, the user more likely than not is bound to
grasp the assembly (which is, when installed in the vehicle, is
elongated in a horizontal direction, along x-axis, see, for
example, FIG. 5), from the front such as to place some of his
fingers on the top portion of the assembly and some of his fingers
on its bottom portion, while covering a substantial portion of the
front of it with the palm of his hand. In such a situation, a
functional switch (such as a capacitive switch, for example,
adapted to effectuate a wireless telephonic connection) that is
cooperated with the front of the assembly will, more likely than
not, be activated by the proximity of the palm and/or fingers of
the user. It is also quite likely that more than one of such
neighboring switches will be triggered simultaneously, thereby
activating corresponding functions/assembly devices each and every
time the user attempts to adjust the rearview mirror. Clearly, such
situation is undesirable, especially when at least one of the
switches activates a function requiring a participation of a
third-party provider. It is preferred, therefore, to be able to
mute (lock, stop temporarily, suspending the performance of) the
functional switches for a period of time required to adjust the
orientation of the rearview mirror. Such "muting" or "locking" can
be implemented, for example, by providing a second set (of at least
one) switch that locks-out the functional switches in response to
an input corresponding to the angular adjustment of the rearview
mirror by hand. Moreover, it is appreciated that this problem is
specific to embodiments of a rearview assembly and simply does not
exist in a case of, for example, networking/information/display
modalities implemented in connection with and effectuated via input
applied to a dash-board or any other immobile part of the vehicle.
Therefore, traditional "lock-out" switch solutions that are
applicable to permanently fixed devices are not likely to be
befitting the vehicular rearview assembly.
[0296] In one embodiment, a dedicated pad (e.g., and
electrically-conductive layer) for a lock-out capacitive switch can
be added to the bottom and/or top surfaces of the assembly within
such a distance behind the first surface of the mirror element as
to be within the reach of a finger, for example within about an
inch behind the edge 10602 defining the aperture 10604 of the
housing shell/casing 10602 of FIG. 49. Alternatively, the lock-out
electrically-conductive layer may be disposed on an outer or inner
surface of a peripheral portion of the carrier, e.g., at the outer
surface of the peripheral portion 9230c of the carrier 9230 of FIG.
33A or the carrier 10606 of FIG. 49. The conductor may be solid
metallic layer or a patterned during the process of deposition such
as vacuum metallization), a carbon ink coating, or conductive
epoxy, to name just a few. The sensing area can also be configured
by placing a flex circuit along a corresponding surface in any of
the abovementioned locations. A conductive pad may be electrically
extended to a PCB of the embodiment via, e.g., flex-circuit
connectors, conductive elastomers, metallic spring clips, or a buss
bar-type connection (e.g., a bar known as "board stiffener" that
forms a buss surface perpendicular to the PCB). In the latter case
(not shown), a conductive pad of the switch is disposed on a
surface of a buss that is located in a bottom portion of the
housing or in the upper portion of the housing close to the housing
shell and perpendicular to the PCB which, in turn, is substantially
parallel to the mirror element of the assembly. As a result, the
conductive pad is extended alongside the inner surface of the
housing and is capable of sensing the presence of a finger at the
side of the mirror element of the assembly.
[0297] FIG. 51 schematically shows an embodiment 10800 of a
rearview assembly that includes a housing structure 10802 hosting a
transflective mirror system utilizing an EC-element 10806 with a
cut-out design, where the second substrate 10806b is either notched
or sized-down as compared to the first substrate 10806a. The
EC-element 10806 defines a strip-like ledge 10808 between the first
and second substrates 10806a, 1806b extending along a bottom
portion of the EC-element 10806. The EC-element is further layered,
at the first substrate 10806a, with an additional thin lite of
glass 10810 (referred to herein as veneer) that extends beyond the
first substrate 10806a such as to define a circumferential ledge
10812. As shown, a back surface 10810b of the veneer 10810 is
overcoated with a transparent electrically-conductive layer 10814
(e.g., a TCO layer) a portion 10814c of which is electrically
isolated by a non-conductive trench 10814b from a portion 10814a
and is adapted to operate as a conductive pad of the capacitive
switch. The capacitive-switch pad 10814c is electrically extended,
through a conductor 10815 (such as, e.g. the element 9244 or 9252
of FIGS. 33A, 33B) to a PCB 10815a containing corresponding
capacitive-switch electronic circuitry. An edge surface of the
veneer 10810 is rounded off circumferentially, around the perimeter
of the veneer with a radius Rad of no less than 2.5 mm. A front
edge of the housing structure 10802 defines an aperture encircling
the EC-element 10806 and is preferably also Rad-rounded around its
perimeter. As shown, the veneer 18010 is adhered to the first
substrate 10806a with an optically-transparent adhesive layer
10816.
[0298] Referring further to FIG. 51, the EC-element 10806 is
configured in the above-mentioned fashion and includes an EC-cell
10818 containing, as described elsewhere in this application, a
transparent electrically-conductive layer 10822 and a peripheral
ring portion 10824 on the substrate 10806a, the seal 10826, and the
transflective thin-film stack 10828 on the second substrate 10806b.
A transparent electrically-conductive portion 10830 (that is
isolated from the layer 10822 and disposed on the ledge 10808) is
optional. The electrical isolation between the layers 10830 and
10822 assures that the electromagnetic coupling between the EC-cell
of the embodiment and the capacitive switch is minimized. The
backlighting source 10832 is disposed anywhere behind the
EC-element 10806 (as shown, in front of the PCB 10815a) and is
configured to illuminate, through corresponding optical channels
and/or light-guiding components (not shown) the indicia layer 10834
that is placed on a supporting surface (not shown) provided by a
housing component of the assembly. A conductive layer 10840, which
is carried on the inner surface of the housing structure 10802 and
extends transversely to the layers 10814c, 10822, 10824, 10830 and
the first surface of the EC cell 10818, is adapted to define a
conductive pad of the lock-out sensor. The layer 10840 is operably
communicated via known electrically-conductive means such as, for
example, a flex cable, wire, electrically-conductive adhesive,
electrically conductive clip, electrically-conductive thin-film
member (coating or foil or mesh), or a spring member (not shown)
with a responsive portion of the electronic "lock-out" circuitry
such as to define a lock-out capacitive switch. While the layer
10840 is shown in FIG. 51 to be a liner to an upper portion of the
housing structure 10802, it is understood that generally the layer
10840 may be disposed on an inner bottom surface or an inner side
surface of the housing structure 10802. Optionally, a layer that is
functionally equivalent to the layer 10840 can be disposed on an
outer surface of the housing structure 10802 or, in a related
embodiment, on an auxiliary PCB portion (not shown) that is
electrically communicated with the PCB 10815a and is affixed
transversely to it and to the conductive pad 10814c. (This
structure is sometimes referred to as "board stiffener"). It is
appreciated that, in general, any specific embodiment of the
rearview assembly of the invention can be configured to contain a
conductive pad of the capacitive switch and a conductive pad of the
lock-out switch that are disposed transversely with respect to one
another.
[0299] In one embodiment, a "lock-out" switch may be configured to
include sensing pad(s) that are hidden from view and added in
proximity to the sensing pads corresponding to functional
capacitive switches (for example by the sides, and optionally
between and above or below the sensing pads corresponding to
functional capacitive switches at the front) of the assembly. When
a user intends to activate a particular function or device of the
assembly and extends his finger to a portion of the first surface
correspondingly identified by indicia area or virtual button, the
"hidden" areas are configured not to perceive the presence of the
small area of the finger as they are sufficiently distanced from
the sensing pad of the functional switch. In contradistinction,
however, when the user grabs the assembly from the front to tilt
it, the area of the palm of his hand covers both a functional
switch and a "lock-out" switch, the latter causing corresponding
electronic circuitry to temporarily mute functional switches of the
assembly. FIGS. 52(A, B) schematically illustrate such "hidden"
positioning of the conductive pad(s) 10902, 10902' of a lock-out
sensor with respect to conductive pad(s) 10906, 10906' of
capacitive switch(es).
[0300] In another embodiment where a sensing area of a functional
capacitive switch is disposed on surface I of the EC-mirror
element, a transparent conductor such as a TCO (for example, ITO)
is applied to surface I of the mirror and is configured as a
capacitive sensor input. Although the static offset signal of the
capacitive switch may be significant due to the presence of the TCO
layer (which is an effective ground) on the second surface (surface
II) of the EC-element, the signal produced between a large-area
hand of the user and the first surface capacitive pad is
nevertheless measurable in comparison with the static offset and,
therefore, detectable. As the cap touch circuit is tolerant of high
resistance connections, higher resistance coatings may be used as a
lower cost solution.
[0301] An alternative embodiment of a lock-out switch may be
advantageously beneficial for the situation where more than one of
functional capacitive switches is triggered simultaneously.
Specifically, the PCB-circuitry may be configured to lock out all
of the functional switches in response to received data
representing switch activation from more than one of standard
inputs (switch pads). FIG. 52C illustrates this concept, showing
electrically isolated from one another capacitive pads 10910
operably connected to the circuitry that is responsive to a
multiple-pad input. FIG. 52D illustrates a disposition of the
capacitive pad 10914 of a lock-out switch in a bottom portion of
the peripheral portion of the carrier (such as the portion 9230c of
FIG. 32A, not shown here.)
[0302] In general, an electrically-conductive coating appropriately
positioned anywhere on or in proximity with a mirror element of the
assembly can be configured to operate as a pad of the capacitive
lock-out switch, as long as this coating is electrically isolated
from electrodes of the EC-element and does not interfere with the
performance of the EC-element.
[0303] It is appreciated that coordination of operation of any
functional switch (such as a capacitive switch activating an
information display of a rearview mirror, for example) and that of
a lock-out switch should preferably be time-coordinated to assure
that no false trigger occurs. In one embodiment, for example, the
controlling electronic circuitry of the assembly is adapted to
delay the activation of a function or device triggered by a
particular functional switch by time-delay of, for example, 100
msec (or any other time chosen depending on configuration of
electronic circuitry involved). In addition, the system is
configured not to activate the function/device (i.e., to nullify
the triggering signal) if the controlling circuitry receives an
activation signal from a lock-out switch during this time-delay.
Having activation of a device delayed is typically achieved by
shortening of the pulse sent to the telematics control unit by the
amount of the lockout gating period. The length of the output
pulse, therefore, does not represent the intended duration of the
user's interaction with the functional switch (i.e, it does not
represent the duration of the user input). To correct for this, the
activation pulse sent to the control unit can be stretched by the
amount of time by which the pulse has been delayed.
[0304] In yet another implementation, an optical detection-based
lock-out switch can be implemented, which would be configured as
discussed above in reference to, e.g., FIGS. 14A-C and 15. IR
wavelengths for operation of such an optical lock-out switch can be
judiciously selected to minimize interference with any functional
light sensor contemporaneously used in the assembly. If desired,
the optical lock-out switch can operate at a wavelength detectable
by the glare sensor of the assembly. In this case, the difference
(delta value) in readout data respectively corresponding to
readings with the IR-source "on" and "off" is calculated, with
averaging multiple delta values. Here, the high level of delta
values will be indicative of the attempt to grab the mirror
assembly. In addition or alternatively, multiple IR-sources can be
employed on either left or right side of the mirror element to
improve detection capability of the embodiment. As the IR sources
may interfere with the accurate measurement of glare and ambient
levels of light used by the EC circuitry, the IR sources may be
pulsed and time-interleaved with the EC-light-level readings.
Embodiments of Electrical Connectors
[0305] Existing designs and processes for configuring electrical
connections of a rearview assembly involve soldering of various
components to both sides of a given substrate such as a PCB with
appropriate electronic circuitry and, alternatively or in addition,
the use of multiple clip-like-shaped connectors the positions of
which should precisely match the designated locations on
corresponding opto-electronic components within the assembly. The
need in formation of the electrical contacts on both sides of a
given PCB increases the cost of the final assembly. Indeed,
flipping the PCB after the contacts have been formatted on one of
its sides and running the process again to establish the contact on
the other side effectively doubles the time processing time. At the
same time, the quality of soldering process has to be controlled
and/or verified to assure that created electrical impedance remains
within the design range. Moreover, once soldered, a given
electrical contact remains non-removable, for practical purposes,
and if a positioning or soldering mistake has been made, results in
a loss of a circuitry component. Furthermore, manual solder and
assembly processes add labor cost and potentially create
field-reliability problems. In addition, mechanical integration of
various components in a housing structure of a rearview assembly
usually implies that employed electrical contacts should be able to
accommodate various ranges of mechanical tolerances without losing
their functionality. For example, as the separation gap between the
back of the EC element and the PCB with auto-dimming circuitry may
vary within the prescribed range, a connector configured to provide
electrical communication between the former and the latter not only
should be operational as a "variable spatial range" connector but
also be able to withstand different mechanical force, applied to it
when the EC-element and PCB are pressed against one another,
without losing its elasticity. Typically, at a high-end of force
range the existing connectors may mechanically interfere with a
mirror element and cause image distortions, while at a low-end of
force they do not guarantee a stable electrical junction. This
problem is particularly exacerbated in an embodiment where a mirror
element of the rearview assembly is housed in a housing/casing
structure that is devoid a portion extending over the first surface
of the mirror element. In this case, controlling the pressure
applied by various sources (such as electrical contacts connecting
the electronic circuitry at the back of the assembly to various
components of the mirror element) to the means for affixing the
mirror element to a supporting element (such as an adhesive or a
adhesive-treated foam tape commonly used for attachment of the
carrier to the back of the mirror element, for example) becomes a
non-trivial task, as the pressure-creating elements must be
configured to exert a pressure within the limits not exceeding
those at which the means for affixing the mirror element fails
and/or those at which the performance of the mirror element itself
is compromised. In particular, conventionally used plastics and
adhesive means typically have an upper limit of force that these
means can withstand, on a long time scale, without
disassembling/detaching/deforming (corresponding to the so called
"thermoplastic cold flow"). A typical EC-element-based mirror
element also has an upper limit of applied pressure at which the
mirror element breaks. Specific embodiments of the invention offer
solutions to the above-mentioned concerns by providing
electrically-conductive structures configured to establish an
electrical communication between the opposite surfaces of the PCB,
and the installation of which does not require any soldering and
lands itself to a fully automated process. As a result, proposed
embodiments facilitate a one-step positioning process that
populates both sides of the PCB with electrical contacts thereby
drastically reducing the overall cost of the assembly. Connectors
used in present embodiments are characterized by a
spring-compression curve that allows an operation within a wide
range of mechanical displacement without creating an excessive
compression force. It is noted that these embodiments can be used
to establish electrical communication between the electronic
circuitry and the EC-cell of the EC-element of the invention as
well as between the electronic circuitry and a conductive pad of
the embodiments of the capacitive switch.
[0306] FIGS. 54(A-D) illustrate exemplary connectors for use in
embodiments of the invention. For example, as shown in FIG. 54A, a
compressible pre-sized conductive polymeric "zebra-strip" connector
can be used to pair electrical contacts 11104a, 11104b, 11104c
consolidated into a localized area with corresponding contact pads
11108a, 11108b, 11108c and, through the contact pads, electrically
bridge each of the regions 11104a, 11104b, 11104c with
corresponding electrical contacts on a PCB 11110 (compare, e.g.,
with elements 9240, 9252, 9246, and 9248 of the embodiment 9250 of
FIG. 33B, for example). In implementing the embodiment of FIG. 54A,
we tested a zebra-strip Fujipoly 6127 (FujiPoly America, Carteret,
N.J.). Alternatively, a conductive polymeric cord (such as that
used for EMI gasketing applications) can be used in place of the
connector 9252. A conductive polymer cord for use in an electrical
drive circuit may include, e.g., silver; another metal overcoated
with silver, non-conductive fillers like glass overcoated with
silver, aluminum, nickel, copper, gold, or palladium. Conductive
polymers so constructed generally have a lower initial contact
resistance, as well as a lower increase in resistance after
performance testing. A conductive polymer cord for use in an
embodiment of a capacitive switch may include various conductive
fillers as mentioned above as well as less conductive fillers such
as carbon graphite. In commerce, conductive polymeric cords are
offered, e.g., by Laird Technologies (Chesterfield, Mo.), Majr
Products (Saegertown, Pa.), or Parker Chomerics (Woburn,
Mass.).
[0307] In another embodiment such as the embodiment 9200 of FIG.
33A, a pogo-stick 11116 of FIG. 54B which is internally loaded with
a spring (not shown) elastically adjusting the position of a head
11116a of the stick to any point within a predetermined range a,
can be used to implement the connector 9238. In another embodiment,
a one-sided interconnect such as an Iriso clip 11120 of FIG. 54C
can be pre-attached/soldered/welded) to provide electrical
communication between the PCB 11124 and a given conductive pad
(e.g., configured as the connector 9252 between the PCB 9410 and
the conductive pad 9240 in the embodiment 9400 of FIG. 37A). It is
appreciated, that the protruding tongue 11120a of the clip 11120
can be broken off from the PCB during handling. It may be
advantageous, therefore, to employ instead a one-sided interconnect
11126 of the type shown in FIG. 54D that has side walls 11128
protecting a compliant pin 11130 from the mechanical impact.
Attachment of such interconnect to the board 11124 may be carried
out from the top side through a hole 11132 in the PCB 11124 to
simplify and lower the cost of manufacture.
[0308] As discussed in reference to FIG. 33B, 37A, 39A, the
electrical connector 9252 can include a conductive polymer that is
either co-molded into shape during PCB holder manufacturing process
or is pre-molded (by, e.g., extrusion into a cylinder) and
inserted, as a separate element, into a passage through the
PCB.
[0309] Another embodiment may employ a two-sided interconnect
described in reference to FIGS. 55(A-E) and mentioned as element
9342 of FIG. 35C. Here, the embodiment 12000 of the interconnect
takes a form of a slender two-sided clip having, on each side, a
slender spring leaves 12004a, 12004b that preferably have
rectangular cross-section and may be arced. Each of the leaves
12004a, 12004b has a width that varies from its upper value at the
foundation 12008a, 12008b of the leaf to its lower value at the top
12012a, 12012b of the leaf. In one embodiment, the width of the
leaf 12004a, 12004b varies linearly with distance. Each of the
leaves 12004a, 12004b is attached, at a corresponding foundation
12008a, 12008b, directly to a preferably symmetrical clip-like
frame 12016 having, as shown, retention snaps 12020a, 12020b formed
at corresponding frame lands 12024a, 12024b. The retention snaps
12020a, 12020b are tilted inward with respect to the frame 12016.
At the top 12012a, 12012b, each leaf 12004a, 12004b terminates with
a corresponding contact portion. In one embodiment, the contact
portions of the interconnect 12000 may include spoon end 12028a,
12028b. In a specific embodiment, the spoon ends may have
corresponding concave surfaces that face the inside of the
embodiment 12000. Transitions 12032a, 12032b between the contact
portions 12028a, 12028b and the corresponding leaves 12004a, 12004b
are appropriately curved such as to make tips 12036a, 12036b of the
contact portions 12028a, 12028b protrude outwardly with respect to
the corresponding leaves.
[0310] The embodiment 12000 may be constructed from a single
metallic sheet with a formation process and have either symmetrical
or asymmetrical structure. The asymmetrical structure may be
advantageous in situations where the contact between a spoon end
with the PCB on one side of the carrier is located in-board with
respect to a contact on the other side of the carrier, between
another spoon end and the EC-element's connector. In operation, the
two-sided interconnector provides electrical communications between
the elements located on opposite sides of the PCB drive circuitry.
FIGS. 55(D, E) illustrate the mating between the extended portion
10606a of the carrier such as the carrier 10606 of FIG. 49 and the
embodiment 12000. As shown, the interconnect 12000 is preferably
automatically lowered through an opening 12040 in the extended
portion 10606a of the carrier 10606 and then translated laterally
towards the land 12044 until the paired inner surfaces of the frame
12016 are in grasp with the land 12044. The retention snaps 12020a,
12020b further facilitate a firm affixation of the interconnect
12000 to the extended portion 10606a. During the assembly process,
when an EC-element 12050 is being affixed to the carrier 10606, the
top spoon end 12028a is brought a solderless interfacial contact
with an electrical extension 12054, thereby connecting an electrode
(not shown) of the EC-element 12050 with the leaf 12004a and,
through the body of the interconnect 12000, to the PCB and various
electrical components on the back side of the carrier 10606. An
interfacial contact to the EC-element 12050 can be adapted through
a bus bar, J-clip, or other conductive surface (e.g., conductive
polymer dispensed or traced onto a revealed surface; vapor
deposition metal placed on glass). The interfacial contact with/to
drive board can be formed with a metallic component placed onto the
`backside` of the PCB (e.g., electroless nickel immersion gold
surface plating), which backside facing the back of the assembly.
The interfacial contact between the contact portion 12028b and the
front side of the PCB (the side of the PCB that faces the front of
the assembly) can also be made by either orienting the front side
of the board to the contact and the incorporation of any metallic
pad on this front side or, alternatively, by cutting/routing a hole
into the PCB and soldering a metallic pad around at least a portion
of the hole. A second interconnect, shown as 12064 in FIG. 55D, is
configured to establish electrical communication between the
conductive pad of a capacitive switch of the UI of the invention,
thereby operating in place of, e.g., the electrical pin 9244 of
FIG. 33A or the connector 9252 of FIG. 33B.
[0311] Generally, the leaf 12004a, 12004b and the contact portion
12028a, 12028b of the interconnect 12000 are judiciously shaped
such as to ensure an interconnect deflection within a
pre-determined limit that is defined by a typical assembly process.
It is preferred that an embodiment of the interconnect is
configured to ensure that contact force that such embodiment exerts
on a portion of the assembly with which it is in electrical and
mechanical connection is minimized, and, at the same time, to
ensure that the established electrical connection is stable over
the entire deflection range experience by the embodiment in use.
The amount of force or stress induced by the deflection of the
interconnect during assembly and use should not exceed the yield or
tensile strength of the material used to fabricate the
interconnect. This limitations facilitates the use when the maximum
movement or deflection of the interconnect is smaller than that
which would otherwise cause the interconnect material to yield or
plastically deform. Otherwise, exceeding the yield or tensile
strength of the interconnect material would result in a reduced
contact force induced by the interconnect. If the stress exceeds
the yield strength and subsequent deflections cause a return to a
lower stress state, the resulting contact pressure will be lower
than in the non-permanently deformed case. It is appreciated that,
generally, given the material of choice for the interconnect, the
interconnect structure can be varied to affect its yield point.
Yield point, yield strength, and tensile strength are properties
derived using stress-strain curve relationships. Yield strength
characteristics for several materials are listed in Table 3A
(standard Be-alloys, for example from Materion, Mayfield Heights,
Ohio; remaining materials: standard, for example from Olin Brass,
East Alton, Ill.)
TABLE-US-00004 TABLE 3A Material Temper Yield Strength (KSI) BeCu
25 (C17200) 1/2H 75-95 BeCu 190 (C17200) TM02 95-125 BeCu 290
(C17200) TM02 95-115 BeCu 174 (C17410) 1/2HT 80-100 Phos Bronze 510
(B103) TM02 57 CuNiSi 7025 (B422) TM02 85-110 Copper 102 (B152)
TM02 37 Brass 230 (B36) TM02 48 KSI = 1000 PSI; N/mm{circumflex
over ( )}2 = KSI .times. 6.895
[0312] Generally, the upper limit of a contact force that a
spring-type contact applies at the point of contact with the board,
a portion of the EC-element, or a capacitive switch portion of the
assembly is defined by performance and response to such contact
force of other components within the assembly, for example, by
plastic flow of carrier elements 10606, 10606a; by the amount of
optical distortion exerted by a spring contact onto the EC element
12050. It is appreciated that such contact force should be limited
in order not cause the spring connector of FIGS. 54(B-D) or that of
the embodiment 12000 to perform outside its elastic range. Another
factors defining the connector design are the strength of the
solder use with the connector as well as the strength of adhesive
material or other attachment means use to affix the EC element to
the carrier 10606. Embodiments of electrical connectors used herein
for either the electrical drive circuit of the EC device or the
capacitive switch application, should preferably exert maximum
contact force of 5N, and more preferably 2N. At the same time, an
embodiment of the rearview assembly is configured to assure that,
regardless of the number and type of the electrical connectors
used, the overall outwardly-directed force exerted, aggregately, by
all electrical connectors (and that tends to push outwardly the
mirror element from the aperture of the housing towards the FOV at
the front of the assembly) does not exceed that corresponding to
pressure of about 150 grams per square inch (or about 1.5 N per
square inch) in relation to the overall are of the mirror element.
For example, electrical connectors of an assembly with a mirror
element having a 40 square-inch surface should be configured not to
exert, aggregately, the contact force in excess of about 60 N. A
mirror element with a 20 square-inch face should not be subjected
to about 30 N of contact force applied by the electrical
connectors. So configured assembly assures that the operation of
the adhesive layer affixing the mirror element to the carrier is
maintained. Other limiting factors determining the limit of contact
force include the force the application of which fractures the
mirror element and forces that deform the housing element or other
components within the assembly. These mirror-fracturing and
element-deforming forces generally vary based on the construction
of the assembly as well as on the location of pressure points
relative to the assembly components. Contact force applied to the
mirror element directly can also induce distortion in imaging due
to deformation of the mirror surface caused by the contact
force.
[0313] On the other hand, the lower limit of the contact force
relates to how stable and reliable is the physical contact between
the connector and a responding part at the contact point.
Generally, an accepted minimum contact force for tin-to-tin
contacts is greater than 100 g (approximately 1 N), while that for
silver-to-silver contacts is greater than 50 g (approximately
0.5N), and that for gold-to-gold contacts is greater than 25 g
(approximately 0.25 N).
[0314] In a specific embodiment, the leaf and the spoon end were
fabricated to assure the deflection on the order of 1.1 mm per
side, as compared to the rest position, while exerting a mechanical
stress that is linearly varied with the amount of deflection.
Contacts shown in FIGS. 54(B-D) are also implemented for same 1.1
mm deflection range, with a maximum force of less than 2 N at 1.1
mm of displacement. This deflection range generally depends on and
can be varied as required by the specifics of designs of the PCB,
the EC-element, and the interface between these components. In a
specific embodiment, based on the spring rate of 0.72 N/m, the
contact force applied to the embodiment 12000 during the assembly
process does not exceed 2.0 N, and the rate of linearly-varying
mechanical stress of the embodiment does not exceed approximately
230 MPa/mm.
[0315] For an interconnect used in the EC-drive circuit, a value of
electrical resistance for a contact assuring optimal functionality
is less than 10 Ohms, preferably less than 1 Ohm, and even more
preferably less than 0.050 Ohms. A contact resistance value
characterizing the electrical contact between a connector and a
capacitive switch is preferably less than 5000 Ohms, more
preferably 4000 Ohms, even more preferably 500 Ohms. These
resistance values allow for the design and verification of any
interconnect system that is chosen for either an electrochromic
drive circuit interconnect or a capacitive switch interconnect.
[0316] The greater the difference between the minimum and maximum
contact force values characterizing a stable mechanical contact
between the electrical connector and a responsive element (such as
an electrical pad with which this connector is in mechanical and
electrical contact), the more latitude is available for connector
design (e.g., features of springs, choice of metal, tempers). The
range of motion or displacement provided by a given connector
should also be maximized in light of limitations imposed by the
minimum and maximum contact force values. The relationship between
the force and displacement may be expressed in a
force-vs.-displacement plot. The lower is the value of a slopes of
such a force-displacement graph, the more design latitude there is
for a spring-like connector. The embodiments of connectors used to
provide electrical communication in EC-element based device of
prior art exhibit large spring rate, modulus, or slope of the
force-vs.-displacement characteristic. In contradistinction, the
embodiments of FIGS. 54(B-D) and 12000 have a significantly smaller
spring rate. FIG. 57 shows the force-displacement relationship for
the embodiment 12000 and, for comparison, a an electrical buss-bar
conventionally used in an EC device. Although in this example the
force range chosen for an electrical interconnect 12000 is between
0.5 N and 2.0 N, a system of FIG. 55E can be designed to operate
within a wider range of contact force.
[0317] A related embodiment of an interconnect 12100 including, as
shown in exploded view of FIG. 55F and a schematic side-views of
FIG. 55G, a J-clip sub-portion 12104 and a pin or spade sub-portion
12108, is configured to ensure the electrical communication between
the electrical circuitry associated with a PCB 12112 and an
electrically-conductive portion (such as, for example, an electrode
of the EC-cell, not shown) of the EC-element 12116 while exerting a
substantially zero contact force onto the EC-element 12116. A
J-clip sub-portion 12104 is configured to include an area 12120 of
strain relief affixed and suspended with respect to the land 12124
of the J-clip sub-portion 12104. The pin or spade sub-portion 12108
having an elongated ring-like pin head 12108A and a collar 12108B
may be integrated with the J-clip sub-portion 12104 (for example,
by soldering or welding to the strain-relief area 12120) such as to
protrude transversely from the land 12124. (It is appreciated that
the interconnect 12100 can be configured as a single-piece element,
where the pin sub-portion 12108 and the J-clip sub-portion 12104
are portions of the same three-dimensional J-clip configuration
formed from a pliable electrically-conductive preform, such as a
metallic plate, by stamping, for example). In further reference to
FIG. 55G, the interconnect 12100 is appropriately attached, through
its J-clip sub-portion 12104, to a substrate of the EC-element
12116 in electrical communication with the electrically-conductive
portion of the EC-element 12116. To establish the electrical
connection between the subassembly 12118 and the PCB 12112, the
former and the latter are further brought into contact (through an
opening in a carrier supporting the EC-element, not shown) such as
to press the pin head 12108A through an opening 12132 that is
appropriately plated with an electrically-conductive material
12132A. The depth at which the pin head 12108A is inserted into the
opening 12132 is generally limited by the collar 12108B. The
pin-head 12108A is appropriately configured to form mechanical and
electrical contact with the electrically-conductive plating 12132A,
which is further electrically extended to the electronic circuitry
(not shown) of the rearview assembly, by pushing against the
plating 12132A from inside the throughout-opening 12132 and does
not create any substantial force pushing outwardly (towards the
front of the rearview assembly) against the EC-element 12116.
Alternatively, a spring-like structure (not shown) mounted on the
PCB 12112 could be configured to push against the pin 12108 to
maintain electrical contact and causing substantially no force
applied outwardly against the EC-element.
Embodiments with a Reconfigurable Switch
[0318] It is often desirable to reduce the overall weight and/or
size of a rearview assembly while preserving its operability and
functionality. One solution that facilitates not only the reduction
of weight but also the optimization of the forward and rearview
vision (by optimizing the effective size of the assembly) is the
use of a reconfigurable switch, i.e. a switch that is adapted to
correspond to and to activate more than one functional
modality/system of the assembly.
[0319] A reconfigurable switch can be located in different portions
of the assembly, for example on top of, on the bottom of, or to the
side of an area corresponding to a video- or information display
such as an RCD display. In one embodiment, a reconfigurable switch
is operably associated with operation of the display and adapted to
activate a mode of operation of the assembly that is being
displayed at the display at the moment. For example, as shown
schematically in FIG. 58A, a set 11502 of four reconfigurable
switches is associated with a low portion of the front substrate
11506 of an EC-element of the assembly and is configured to choose
one or more of several modes of operation of or types of
information displayed by a display 11510. Once a choice is made by,
for example, activating a particular switch 11502A, the visual
information displayed on the display 11510 is updated. The updated
information may again present an updated choice of several display
modes to the user (by analogy with a "menu" arrangement, whether
pictorial, or graphical, or textual), in which case the same switch
11502A is re-programmed/reconfigured, according to operation of a
computer processor that is operably linked to the embodiments of
FIG. 58A, to be associated with at least one of the modes presented
on the updated display. It is appreciated that virtual button of a
reconfigurable switch of the invention may be co-located or
overlapped with the area occupied by a display of the assembly. For
example, as shown schematically in FIG. 58B, the lower portion
11512 of the front substrate 11506 of the mirror element is
associated with a display 11516, a portion of the face of which
additionally displays virtual button indicia corresponding to the
set 11502 of reconfigurable switches. Optionally, a portion of
front substrate in which a button of a reconfigurable switch is
located may be protruding from the main land of the front substrate
in a form of extension or a "chin" of the glass substrate (not
shown).
[0320] The reconfigurable switch icons/indicia/legend may be formed
using known display technologies including such technologies as
LCD, VF, LED, OLED, EC, electrophoretic, and electrowetting, to
name just a few. Specific techniques employed in manufacture of a
display with which a reconfigurable switch is associated include
active matrix display, dot matrix display, segmented-numeric or
alphanumeric type display, and segmented icon type display.
Specific liquid crystal displays may include TN, STN, scattering
(such as PDLC or dynamic scattering), dye-type, cholesteric, and/or
DAP type of displays. Alternatively or in addition, the display
device associated with a reconfigurable switch can be configured to
be transmissive (such as a TOLED or a transmissive LCD),
transflective, translucent, reflective, or opaque. Many of the
above-listed types of displays require the use of a sealed cell
similar to a cell used in EC devices. Such a display cell can be
combined with the EC-element-based mirror element using the same
front substrate or be a stand-alone element. As shown in FIG. 58C,
for example, a portion 11520 carrying a set 11502 of reconfigurable
switches may be distinct and separate/separable from (but
optionally integrated with) a portion 11524 containing a mirror
element of the assembly, to which such portion 11520 is
geometrically mated (a gap 11526 between the portions 11520 and
11524 is reduced or even closed upon proper assembly). FIG. 58D
shows in side view a portion of specific embodiment including a
combination of an EC-element 11528 having a first substrate 11528A
forming a ledge 11528C with respect to the second substrate 11528B
and a peripheral ring 11530. (Housing and other elements such as,
for example, electrical connection, light source providing
backlighting of the display and/or indicia of the switch are
omitted for the clarity of illustration.) Behind the ledge 11528C a
reconfigurable/updatable display 11532 is disposed in spatial and
operable coordination with a portion 11536 of the reconfigurable
switch (such as a conductive pad of a capacitive switch, for
example). The display 11532 can be backlit with a lighting system
(not shown) of the assembly configured to deliver
polychromatic/multicolored illumination (illustrated by arrows
11540) to the display 11532.
[0321] As shown in a related embodiment of FIG. 58E, a combination
11544 including a reconfigurable/updatable display 11544A and a
corresponding reconfigurable switch 11544B can be integrated as a
stand-alone component and coordinated with a portion of the housing
element shown schematically as 11546 the outer front edge of which,
in a specific embodiment, is Rad-rounded. The housing element 11546
is adapted to provide housing for an EC-element 11548 as well. In a
specific embodiment of a rearview assembly, a portion of which is
schematically shown in FIG. 58F, a portion 11552, of the housing
11546, corresponding to the combination 11544 can be appropriately
adapted to be pliable and to move with respect to the remaining
portion of the housing and to form a mechanical switch that
facilitates the update of the modes of the display 11544A when
toggled with respect to the display. In, in the configuration of
FIG. 58F, the reconfigurable switch 11544B is configured as a
capacitive switch (or a membrane switch, or another type of switch
as discussed earlier in this application) with an
electrically-conductive pad (now shown), the operation of a
re-configurable/updatable combination 11544 is configured to be
caused by a operably-coordinated combination of a mechanical switch
formed by the pliable portion 11552 and the capacitive switch
11544B.
[0322] In a related embodiment of a rearview assembly (not shown)
containing a reconfigurable display-switch pair in which the
display is configured as a pressure-sensitive element, the optical
properties of which change in response to mechanical pressure, a
user input to the switch area could be recognized, by the
electronic circuitry, via registration of a change in an optical
characteristic in response to the finger's pressure.
Embodiments with Transparent Switch Area
[0323] Configuring the peripheral portion of the housing or carrier
(such as the portion 9230c of FIG. 33A, as discussed above) as an
optically transparent element is advantageous in that, when viewed
by the driver from inside the vehicle, the transparent peripheral
portion 9230c transmits light from the scene in front of the driver
thereby effectively reducing the visually perceived "weight" or
"size" of the rearview assembly. Similarly adapting a "switch area"
of the assembly (i.e., the area that is associated with the virtual
buttons of the UI as observed by the driver) to be transparent
would reduce the forward-looking visual size of the mirror even
further. In this case, various icons (whether reconfigurable as
discussed above or permanent) and conductive pads corresponding to
switches, a reconfigurable display, and other functional elements
can be coordinated with the transparent switch area. For example, a
transparent capacitive switch electrode structure could be formed
by disposing a layer of transparent conductor such as a TCO, a
metallic thin-film (for example, silver), or a coating of carbon
nanotubes or graphene on a transparent substrate (for example,
glass or plastic). This transparent capacitive switch electrode
structure is then further overcoated with a graphics layer
containing icons/indicial for switches and disposed in the
transparent switch area of the rearview assembly. On the other
hand, the opaque/non-transparent components of the assembly (such
as, for example, the mirror housing/casing, the mounting stem of
the assembly, and the PCB or other electronics) are appropriately
oriented not to obstruct the view of the forward scene as viewed by
the driver from inside the vehicle through the transparent switch
area. This concept is illustrated schematically in FIG. 59A,
showing in front view an embodiment 11600 of the rearview assembly
having a transparent lower portion 11604, through which the user
can see the forward scene, and a transparent peripheral portion
11608 of the housing element. A partial cross-sectional view of the
embodiment 11600 is shown in FIG. 59B. A conductive pad 11610 of
the transparent capacitive switch (shown in dashed line and made of
a TCO material such as, for example, ITO, ZNO, AZO and the like) is
deposited on the second surface of the EC-element 11612 in the area
of a ledge formed by the first substrate with respect to the second
substrate. A portion of the pad 11610 is overlaid with a graphics
layer 11616 (whether opaque or translucent), leaving a patch of the
conductive pad electrically-connected to the circuitry at the pack
of the assembly (not shown). The EC-element 11612 is structurally
supported by housing/carrier element 11620 at least a portion of
which is transparent to light. The carrier 11620 is further
mechanically affixed to the back portion of the housing of the
assembly (not shown) and illuminated, from the back with a light
source 11624 highlighting, in an "on" mode, the indicia 11616. (The
light from the source 11624 can be delivered to the indicia through
the transparent carrier 11620 in any known fashion, for example, as
free-space propagating light or light channeled towards the carrier
with the use of a waveguide, not shown). Switch area 11604 could
also be backlit by light 11624 when the level of illumination
provide by the ambient (for ex ample, natural light) is low. One
alternative embodiment is shown schematically in FIG. 59C. Here,
the first and second substrates of the EC-element 11616' are
substantially co-extensive and no ledge is formed between them.
However, a carrier 11620' has a lower transparent portion 11630
configured to protrude, as a chin extension, below the EC-element
11612'. In this implementation, no electronics or opaque portions
of the assembly are positioned behind the transparent portion
11630, as viewed from the front of the assembly.
[0324] While not shown in the drawings, it is appreciated that, a
transparent or translucent mechanical switch structure can be
additionally formed in cooperation with or independently from the
transparent capacitive switch. Corresponding opaque electrical
contacts are moved to an edge of the mechanical switch area not to
obscure the forward looking scene. In one specific embodiment, a
transparent mechanical switch may include a membrane constructed
with the use of transparent plastic film and transparent associated
electrodes. In another specific embodiment the transparent switch
could be a toggle0type or a push-button switch formed primarily out
of transparent plastic.
Embodiments of the Peripheral Ring.
[0325] Embodiments of peripheral rings for EC-elements of vehicular
rearview assemblies discussed so far in related art and in this
application have a single circumferential band 8210 disposed around
a perimeter of the first or second surface of the mirror element
8220, as shown in FIG. 23A. While this "one size fits all" design
has been commonly accepted, it does not address different aesthetic
requirements set by different car manufacturers. We discovered that
configuring an embodiment of a peripheral ring as a multi-band
construct may provide a non-obvious solution to satisfying various
aesthetical requirements to appearance of the mirror. Generally, in
multi-band embodiments of a peripheral ring, a plurality of bands
of spectral filter materials are disposed circumferentially around
a perimeter of and on a surface of a mirror system of the
invention. While different bands of a peripheral ring may be
configured in a quasi-concentric fashion, thus sharing an origin
with one inside the other, a non-concentric configuration and a
segmented configuration are also contemplated to be within the
scope of the present invention. An exemplary illustration of a
multi-band peripheral ring concept is provided in FIG. 23B, where a
top view of a substrate of an embodiment 8230 of a mirror system is
shown to have two peripheral rings 8232, 8234. It is understood
that locations within the mirror system, widths of, and materials
the bands of a peripheral ring are made of will depend on a
particular application and aesthetic requirements. Moreover, it is
understood that different bands may be carried on different
structural surfaces of a mirror system, as is described in more
detail below. In a specific embodiment, therefore, a multi-band
peripheral ring may include bands spatially separated along the
direction of incidence of light onto the mirror system. Generally,
according to the embodiment of the invention, the aggregate of
widths of bands of a multi-band peripheral ring will not exceed 10
mm, and will preferably be less than 6 mm, and most preferably less
than 4 mm. Relative to the aggregate width of a peripheral ring, a
width of a given band can be between 5 percent and 95 percent,
preferably between 10 percent and 90 percent, and most preferably
between 25 percent and 75 percent.
[0326] FIG. 24A schematically shows peripheral regions A, B, C, and
D of a specific embodiment 8300 of a mirror system comprising three
substrates 8310, 8312, 8314 where a multi-band peripheral ring (in
this case, a ring including up to four bands) may be configured.
For simplicity of illustration, no mounting elements (such as a
bezel or a carrier), or conventional optical coatings, or sealing
materials are shown. Although the peripheral regions are identified
on only one side of FIG. 24A, it is understood that these regions
extend in a circumferential fashion around the perimeter of the
embodiment 8300. It is also understood that configuration of a
multi-band peripheral ring is not limited to a single surface of a
particular substrate. Rather, a multi-band peripheral ring may
consist of bands generally disposed on different surfaces (in the
case of embodiment 8300, on either of surfaces I through VI). As
shown, e.g., a multi-band peripheral ring 8320 includes four bands
8322, 8324, 8326, 8328 disposed respectively on the first, second,
third, and fourth surfaces of the embodiment. Generally, several
seals can be used between the substrates forming an EO-element of
the embodiment, each seal corresponding to a particular band of the
peripheral ring. For example, as shown in FIG. 24B, an embodiment
of a two-lite EO-element 8340 may have a peripheral ring 8344
defined by two bands (A and B, corresponding coatings not shown)
and a double seal including seal components 8348, 8346 that
respectively correspond to the bands A and B.
[0327] It is also understood that, in general, some of the
substrates may be transversely offset with respect to other
substrates and/or be of different dimensions in order to
facilitate, e.g., configuration of electrical interconnections and
fabrication processes.
[0328] In reference to FIG. 24C, a peripheral region may be
characterized by specular or non-specular reflectance, or a
reflectance the characteristic of which spatially varies with a
position in the region. The non-specular characteristic may be
formed by choice of material deposited on a substrate 8350, such as
a frit, or the substrate may be altered by bead (or sand or other
media)-blasting, sanding, rubbing, laser treating, deposition of a
transparent layer, a semi-translucent layer with small particles,
or semi-transparent layer that has texture or altered from a smooth
surface by other means. A peripheral region may have a color
determined by various means known in the art such as thin film
interference, deposition of a colored thin film (absorption
effects), paint, frit or other means. Alternatively, a coating or
treatment may be absent in a zone and the aesthetic then determined
by the seal or other components within or behind the corresponding
band of a multi-band ring. It is essential that means employed to
achieve desired aesthetic parameters does not hinder or frustrate
electrical interconnections required for proper functioning of the
embodiment. If a given treatment, coating or other aesthetic means
is employed that is not compatible with the necessary electrical
interconnections then electrical interconnections should be
appropriately modified and/or reconfigured by, e.g., employing
electrically-conductive coatings instead of hard-body connectors.
These reconfigured components may be hidden by the aesthetic means
or may be incorporated as part of the aesthetic means whereby the
reconfigured electrical interconnectors additionally contribute to
the appearance of one or more regions of a band.
[0329] In one embodiment, a band of the peripheral ring (whether it
belongs to a single- or multi-band peripheral ring) may be formed
to include a thin-film coating deposited on a textured glass
surface. For example, a glass surface of a substrate onto which a
thin-film band coating is deposited (such as the second surface of
the first substrate) can be textured and/or roughened (such as by
laser ablation or grinding) to contain, generally in an area
associated with the peripheral ring, a surface relief the roughness
characteristic of which is sufficient for a band of the peripheral
ring to appear optically diffusive when viewed through the
substrate. Surface-roughing (texturing) produces a hazy appearance
of a portion of the glass surface. In addition, the "roughened"
glass area of the peripheral ring region facilitates concealing the
seal material and helps to reduce glare (in reflection) that may be
experienced by the user at night. FIG. 60 shows the relationship
between transmitted haze as measured through a roughened glass
surface and the measured roughness of the surface. The roughness
(R.sub.a, average value, in microns, characterizing measured
surface in at least one direction) depicted in FIG. 60 was measured
across the glass substrate roughened/textured as discussed above,
with a Taylor Hobson Form Tallysurf Aspheric Measurement System
Laser 635 using a 2 micron conisphere stylist having a 40 degree
cone angle, at 0.1 mm per/sec, over a distance of about 30 mm. In
addition, Table 4 illustrates dependence of specular reflectance
measured, through the glass substrate, off of the peripheral ring
reflector disposed on a roughened/textured portion of the
glass.
TABLE-US-00005 TABLE 4 Specular Reflectance Roughness (%) (R.sub.a,
.mu.m) 44.09% 0.021 16.08% 0.1098 7.81% 0.272 6.69% 0.4155 6.17%
0.4877 5.64% 0.5195 5.61% 0.525 5.02% 0.6754 5.09% 1.4007 5.05%
0.763 4.80% 1.9496 4.80% 1.017 4.60% 1.6038 42.13% 0.024 37.32%
0.1116 28.75% 0.2275 23.17% 0.3588 20.70% 0.3994 17.50% 0.5156
6.69% 1.5372 4.82% 2.8088 4.58% 2.7356 4.51% 3.6906 4.50% 4.3943
4.51% 4.5493
[0330] In a specific embodiment, when the roughened ring-like
circumferential portion of the second surface in the perimeter
region of the front substrate of the mirror element is overcoated
with a metallic thin-film band coating, the corresponding
peripheral-ring band will create a rough metallic ("brushed metal")
appearance when viewed from the front of the mirror. On the other
hand, when such roughened peripheral-ring area is overcoated with
an appropriately designed TCO and/or dielectric thin-film stack,
the peripheral-ring band viewed from the front may have a colored
textured appearance. It is appreciated that the width of either
thin-film band coating (whether electrically-conductive or
dielectric) overlaying the roughened portion of the peripheral ring
area does not, generally, equal to that of the roughened portion of
the peripheral ring area. The thin-film band structure may be wider
or narrower than the textured ring-like portion of the glass
surface on which it is deposited. Changing the surface-roughening
pattern using a programmed laser-ablation system, for example, can
produce a variety of textures and aesthetically pleasing peripheral
rings (especially when the roughened area is overcoated with
reflective material.)
[0331] A specific embodiment of a two-band ring where all bands are
disposed on the same surface can be fabricated either in two cycles
(e.g., one band per cycle) or in a single cycle if thin-film
structures of the two bands are appropriate configured to contain
common layers. For example, as schematically shown in FIG. 25A, two
bands A and B of a peripheral ring 8410 are disposed on the same
surface 8412 of a substrate 8414. A reflectance value of a band A
is higher than that of a band B. Both the thin-film stack
corresponding to the band A and that corresponding to the band B
include a common layer 8416 of a TCO or another dielectric material
such as SiO.sub.2, MgO, Ta.sub.2O.sub.5, ZrO.sub.2, MgF.sub.2, ITO,
TiOx, CeOx, SnO.sub.2, ZnS, NiOx, CrO.sub.x, NbO.sub.x, and
ZrO.sub.x, WO.sub.3, NiO or Ti.sub.xSiO.sub.y, zinc oxide, aluminum
zinc oxide, titanium oxide, silicon nitride disposed on the surface
8412. Examples of suitable TCO materials include ITO, F:Sn02,
Sb:Sn02, Doped ZnO such as Al:ZnO, Ga:ZnO, B:ZnO, and/or IZO. The
band A additionally includes a dielectric layer 8418 (selected from
the list above for layer 8416) and a metallic layer 8420 (such a
silver-gold alloy, silver alloys as described below, chrome,
ruthenium, stainless steel, silicon, titanium, nickel, molybdenum,
and alloys of chromium, molybdenum and nickel, nickel chromium,
nickel-based alloys, Inconel, indium, palladium, osmium, cobalt,
cadmium, niobium, brass, bronze, tungsten, rhenium, iridium,
aluminum and aluminum alloys as described below, scandium, yttrium,
zirconium, vanadium, manganese, iron, zinc, tin, lead, bismuth,
antimony, rhodium, tantalum, copper, nickel, gold, platinum, or
their alloys and alloys whose constituents are primarily those
aforementioned materials, any other platinum group metals, and
combinations thereof. The spectral properties of light reflected
from the band A are determined essentially by the material of the
layer 8420 and the aggregate thickness of the layers 8416 and
8418.
[0332] In comparison with the band A, the band B has an additional
layer 8422 interdisposed between the layers 8416 and 8418, which is
used to dramatically reduce the overall reflectance of the band B.
Preferably a metal used for layer 8422 should high value of real
part of a refractive index in order to meet the reflectance
objectives of a given application. The real part of refractive
index should be above about 1.5, preferably above 1.9, and most
preferably greater than about 2.1. The value of the imaginary part
of the refractive index for a metallic material 8422 for attaining
very low reflectance values will vary with the real refractive
index. Lower k values are needed for low real refractive indices
and higher k values will work as the real index increases.
Preferably, both the real and imaginary parts of the refractive
indices should be relatively large. Appropriate metals or materials
for the thin absorbing metal layer include nickel silicide, chrome,
nickel, titanium, monel, cobalt, platinum, indium, vanadium,
stainless steel, aluminum titanium alloy, niobium, ruthenium,
molybdenum tantalum alloy, aluminum silicon alloys, nickel chrome
molybdenum alloys, molybdenum rhenium, molybdenum, tungsten,
tantalum, rhenium, alloys of these metals and other metals or
materials with both the real and imaginary refractive indices being
relatively large. The thickness of the thin metal layer should be
less than about 20 nm, preferably less than about 15 nm and most
preferably less than about 10 nm. The preferred thickness will vary
with the reflectance objective and refractive index of the metal
selected for a given application. It is anticipated that at least
one thin-film layer of the multi-band peripheral ring 8410 may
extend into the viewing area while the others are localized in the
area of the ring. In addition, UV shielding or blocking may be
attained through a combination of material choices and the optical
design of the stack. For example, the dielectric materials may be
selected which display absorption properties. Specifically,
Ti0.sub.2 Ce0.sub.2 and zinc oxide are effective UV absorbers. The
absorption of the UV light by these materials may be augmented
through a judicious optical design of the coating by using a
multilayer stack such as an H/L/H stack. It is appreciated, that
coatings of a particular band of a multi-band peripheral ring that
are located on surfaces preceding the sealing materials should
preferably protect the sealing materials from exposure to the
ambient UV light. The UV blocking means should reduce the UV
transmittance below 5%, preferably below 2.5% and most preferably
below 1%.
[0333] In a non-limiting example, the substrate 8414 is made of
glass, and the surface 8412 is the second surface of the
embodiment. The band B contains the layer 8416 is about 52 nm of
ITO, the layer 8422 is 8.2 nm of Chrome, the layer 8418 is 46 nm of
ITO, and the layer 8420 is 50 nm of silver-gold alloy, with gold
being at about 7% of the composition. When viewed through the first
glass substrate 8414, the band B has a neutral color and a
reflectance of 6.9%. The reflected value of a* is 3.1 and that of
b* is -3.8. The band A, where the Chrome layer 8422 is not present,
has a neutral reflected color and a reflectance of greater than
about 86.6%. The reflected value of a* is -2.0 and that of b* is
0.6. The presence or absence of one layer, therefore, may result in
a reflectance difference value of greater than about 70% for this
coating stack. Table 5 illustrates how the value of reflectance and
color of reflected light may be altered by the adjustment of the
thickness of the layers. The stack may be altered to change the
intensity of the reflectance and/or the color as needed for a given
application. Substitution of any or all of the layers with
different materials can be used to attain further degrees of
freedom in designing a coating for a particular set of optical
requirements. Table 6 shows how the color and transmittance vary
with the thickness of the high reflectance AgAu7x layer. As a layer
is thinned, the transmittance increases with only subtle changes to
the color and reflectance.
TABLE-US-00006 TABLE 5 ITO Cr ITO AgAu7x R a* b* 52 8.2 46 50 6.9
3.1 -3.8 42 8.2 46 50 7.0 4.7 2.6 32 8.2 46 50 8.0 3.4 10.9 22 8.2
46 50 9.9 0.5 16.9 12 8.2 46 50 12.2 -2.2 18.8 62 8.2 46 50 7.9
-1.1 -6.1 82 8.2 46 50 11.7 -9.0 -0.3 52 6.2 46 50 7.0 5.1 -15.4 52
4.2 46 50 12.4 4.0 -20.8 52 10.2 46 50 9.1 0.8 4.7 52 14.2 46 50
15.7 -1.0 8.0 52 8.2 36 50 10.1 3.2 -7.3 52 8.2 26 50 14.7 3.5 -8.7
52 8.2 56 50 5.1 7.1 -7.4 52 8.2 66 50 5.2 25.7 -37.3
TABLE-US-00007 TABLE 6 ITO Cr ITO AgAu7x R a* b* T 52 8.2 46 50 6.9
3.1 -3.8 0.5 52 8.2 46 40 6.8 2.8 -2.6 1.1 52 8.2 46 30 6.5 2.3
-0.1 2.6 52 8.2 46 20 5.9 1.7 4.0 6.5 52 8.2 46 10 6.1 2.3 4.1
16.8
[0334] The reflectance value of light reflection in the area of the
"bright" band A is dominated by the reflectance of the metal
positioned away from the viewer. If the silver-gold alloy from the
previous example is replaced with chrome and the other layers are
re-optimized (the thickness of the layer 8416 of ITO is 53 nm and
the thickness of the layer 8418 of ITO is 57 nm), then a neutral
appearance in reflection is still attained but the reflectance of
the band A is reduced to about 50%. If, instead of silver-gold
alloy, Ruthenium is used in the layer 8420, the reflectance is
about 57%, Rhenium yields about 38%, Molybdenum 45%, Copper 54%,
Germanium 29%, Tantalum 39%, and other metals will yield other
reflectance values depending on their properties. This embodiment
is not limited to this set of metals and other metals (described
elsewhere in this document) with different reflectance values and
hues may be used and are within the scope of this art. Moreover,
multiple metals may be employed where the thickness of each layer
is adjusted to attain the reflectance and hue for a given
application. For example, in the case where a silver alloy is used
as the second metal layer, a high reflectance is attained. If it is
important to have lower reflectance and opacity one can include an
additional metal or metals between the silver alloy layer and the
viewer to attenuate the intensity of the reflectivity. The
additional layer may provide other benefits such as adhesion,
corrosion protection or any other of beneficial properties.
Typically, the reflectance will decrease as the thickness of the
additional layer(s) is increased, eventually reaching the
reflectance of the additional metal when the thickness reaches a
critical thickness. Alternatively, if only the reflectance is to be
reduced, and transmittance is not needed to be low (see embodiments
below) the thickness of the metal, such as silver gold alloy, can
be reduced thus decreasing the reflectance and increasing the
transmittance. In other embodiments where lower reflectance is
desired in combination with low transmittance, the additional metal
or absorbing layer may be placed behind the reflector metal,
relative to the viewer on the outside portion of the rearview
assembly. In this manner, the thickness of the reflecting metal
layer may be adjusted as needed to attain the desired reflectance
value and the thickness of the additional layer behind the
reflector metal can be adjusted as needed to attain the desired
transmittance value. The metal above or below the silver layer may
be selected to be, e.g., chromium, stainless steel, silicon,
titanium, nickel, molybdenum, and alloys of chrome, and molybdenum
and nickel, nickel chromium, molybdenum, and nickel-based alloys,
Inconel, indium, palladium, osmium, tungsten, rhenium, iridium,
molybdenum, rhodium, ruthenium, tantalum, titanium, copper, nickel,
gold, platinum, and other platinum-group metals, as well as alloys
the constituents of which are primarily aforementioned materials.
Combinations of metal layers are selected so that the reflectance
may be set between about 45 and 85% with the transmittance between
about 45 and 5%. Preferably the reflectance is between 55% and 80%
with transmittance intensity between about 35% and 10%.
[0335] It is recognized that appropriate optimization of a
thin-film stack of a particular band of the peripheral ring will
affect the optical properties of the band. In a specific
embodiment, it may be preferred to include a layer of a quarter
wave thickness and a refractive index intermediate between the
first TCO or dielectric layer and the refractive index of the
substrate, e.g., glass or other transparent media between the
substrate and the TCO layer. Flash overcoat layers of materials
mentioned in U.S. Pat. No. 6,700,692 may also be incorporated into
the above described designs. Depending on the thickness and optical
properties of the materials chosen for the flash layer(s),
adjustments may be needed to the underlying stack to maintain a
similar degree of match or mismatch between the relatively opaque
region and the transflective region(s).
[0336] In order to have a noticeably different appearance between
the bands of a multi-band peripheral ring, when required, the
corresponding brightness values should differ by at least 3 L*
units. Preferably the brightness values of the bands will differ by
greater than about 10 L* units, more preferably by about 20 L*
units, even more preferably by more than about 50 L* units. The low
reflectance band of the peripheral ring should be less than about
60%, more preferably less than about 30%, even more preferably less
than 20% and most preferably less than about 12%. The value of
reflectance of the high-reflectance band should be greater than
about 40%, preferably greater than about 50%, even more preferably
greater than about 60% and most preferably greater than about 70%.
The difference in reflectance values between the two bands may be a
difference in magnitude of the specular reflectance or it may be a
difference in the specular and non-specular reflectance. In
addition or alternatively, the two bands have a difference in color
or hue. The corresponding difference in C* values (measured in
reflectance) should be greater than about 5 units, preferably
greater than about 10 units, more preferably greater than about 15
units and most preferably greater than about 25 units. The color
difference may be combined with changes in either reflectance
magnitude, reflectance type (specular or non-specular) or some
other aesthetic effect such as surface texturing.
[0337] FIGS. 25B through 25D present different variants of the
embodiment of FIG. 25A. The stacks A and B in FIG. 25B, for
example, do not have the first TCO or dielectric layer disposed on
glass as shown in FIG. 25A. (If the first TCO covered the entire
surface, then its removal would result in a lower sheet resistance
in the viewing area and potentially increasing the switching or
darkening time.) The reflectance in the two bands and color of
ambient light incident from the first surface and reflected by the
bands in the +z direction are relatively unaffected by the removal
of the first ITO layer. The color and reflectance may be tuned or
adjusted as described above but with one less degree of freedom.
The thickness of the layers, as described above, can be altered to
change the color. The ease of color tuning is reduced when a layer
is absent. The embodiment of FIG. 25B demonstrates a basic
structure of a two-band peripheral ring having a high-reflectance
band and a low-reflectance band. FIG. 25C, in comparison with FIG.
25B, has an additional TCO or dielectric layer 8416 as the layer
distal to the viewer. This layer may be present in the ring area
only or it may extend into the viewing area. This layer may be
present to protect the metal layers or improve the adhesion to the
seals or provide an altered electrical contact to the buss or
electro optic material. FIG. 25D, in comparison with FIG. 24A,
shows an additional TCO or dielectric layer 8426 on top of the
layers 8420 in both bands A and B. The layer 8426 can add
properties similar to those as described in reference to FIG. 25C.
Furthermore, if the outermost layer is a TCO then it will lower the
sheet resistance in the viewing area or modify the optical
thickness and the resultant color in the bright and predominantly,
the dark state of an EC as described in Our Prior Applications. A
TCO layer used within the area of a peripheral ring serves a
purpose of attaining the desired reflectance and color, and when it
extends beyond the peripheral ring it also serves as a transparent
electrode for the EC-cell, the conductivity of which may be
modified by additional TCO layers. The thickness of a TCO layer in
various positions in the stack may be optimized to coordinate the
desired color in the ring positions and the viewing area in the
bright and dark state. Additional TCO layers that extend beyond the
ring area may be added on top of the ring layers to add additional
conductivity to the electrode.
[0338] It is appreciated that when a multi-band peripheral ring is
disposed on the first surface instead of the second surface, the
order of the layers should be reversed (with respect to the viewer)
in order to preserve the optical properties of the ring.
[0339] As demonstrated, configuring bands of a multi-band
peripheral ring to have common thin-films layers makes the
multi-band ring more suitable for manufacturing. One technique to
facilitate a single-cycle manufacturing is to use simplified
masking and registration of multiple masks. There are several
masking options available for deposition of the multi-band coating
depending on the type of coater used (e.g., in-line or turret).
FIG. 26 shows one possible mask construction including an edge mask
8510 and the plug mask 8512. It is understood that other masking or
fabrication options are viable for making these products and the
invention is not limited to this particular example. In a turret
type coater the substrate 8514 to be coated is held stationary
relative to the target with or without masking present. The target
or other deposition means are activated and the substrate is coated
in areas not masked. The part then cycles to another deposition bay
where the process is repeated with the same or different masking
arrangement.
[0340] The number of deposition bays is selected based on a given
application. In order to produce the construction described in FIG.
25A, the substrate would be arranged with only the plug mask so
that both bands A and B receive the coating. Optionally, the plug
mask 8512 may be absent so that the layer 8416 covers the entire
surface of the substrate in addition to the regions A and B.
Further, the edge mask 8510 is used to prevent the deposition of
the layer 8422 in the region A and the plug mask 8512 is used to
limit the deposition of layer 8422 in the region B. The layer 8418
would be disposed similarly to the layer 8416. In the case of the
layer 8420, only the plug mask 8512 would be used. It is understood
that other masks may be added or subtracted as needed to achieve
the proper thickness and locations of the layers on the part and is
within the capabilities of one skilled in the art.
[0341] Generally, a dark/opaque material such as an applique may be
disposed at the back of the mirror element. In embodiment including
two lites of glass, such applique may be disposed on or behind the
fourth surface and does not need to terminate at an edge of
peripheral region B. For aesthetic reasons, such as matching the
color of the vehicle interior, the applique may be of a color other
than black. In other embodiments it is possible that embedded light
sources with means such as matte finish and/or anti-reflective
coatings (to decrease the visibility when off) are incorporated
within region B. If the band B has low reflectance (and,
accordingly, high transmittance) and the adjacent band A has high
reflectance (and low transmittance), the light from the embedded
light sources will traverse the mirror element towards the viewer
substantially only through the band B because the band A and the
central portion of the mirror have a relatively low transmittance.
Alternatively, the light can originate from the edges of the glass
or from another source direction and transmit through zone B either
relatively collimated or with a spread of angles. The light
source(s) of the embodiment may be arranged and integrated with
other functionalities for a variety of purposes. In one embodiment
the light sources indicate an approaching vehicle in the blind spot
of the driver by scrolling from the top middle to the top left for
a vehicle on the left and from the top middle to the top right for
vehicles in the right blind zone. The light sources could also be
used as a compass indicator with light at the top middle and bottom
of the mirror corresponding to N,S,E,W. with additional points as
desired. The light source(s) could also be used as a make-up or
vanity mirror that might only allow activation if the vehicle were
in park. Decorative functions or themes such as a holiday theme of
red and green lights could also be incorporated into the peripheral
ring lighting. Additionally, layers in a particular band of a
peripheral ring may have non-uniform thickness as needed to attain
particular functional or aesthetic effects. This can be seen in
FIG. 27, where a band in region B is divided into two portions
designated as B1 and B2 and generally having different reflectance
and transmittance values. The two regions in zone B can be
comparable to stacks of the prior or related art and as described
of the novel coatings and structures defined in this patent. The
transmittance in the low reflectance and high reflectance zones, in
some embodiments, is less than about 5%, preferably less than about
2%, more preferably less than about 0.5% and most preferably less
than about 0.25%. This is so that the seal is protected from UV
light which can degrade the integrity of the seal, as described
above. If, however, it is important to convey visual information
through the seal area, the transmittance may be relatively high as
described above.
[0342] As already mentioned, in a specific embodiments it may be
beneficial to have all or part of the multi-band peripheral ring be
at least partly transparent in the visible, UV or NIR spectra. For
instance, a glare sensor can be positioned behind the ring when a
band of region A and/or B has sufficient transmittance in the
relevant part of the electromagnetic spectrum and the seal (if
present in a particular band) also has the necessary transmittance.
Here, teachings of U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,342,707; 7,417,717; 7,663,798
(different means for attaining a transflective coating, including a
graded transition) and U.S. patent application Ser. Nos.
11/682,121; 11/713,849; 11/833,701; 12/138,206; 12/154,824;
12/370,909 (transflective stacks, including means to minimize the
color difference between multiple zones of a mirror element and to
increase durability) can be advantageously utilized. A number of
different means may be employed to produce a transflective ring.
For instance, a band of a multi-band peripheral ring may comprise a
thin metal layer, a semiconductor material such as silicon, or may
be composed of a dielectric multilayer stack. Silver or a
dielectric multi-layer is most applicable when both relatively high
transmittance and reflectance is desired. The semiconductor layer
may comprise Silicon or doped silicon. Small amounts of dopants may
be added to alter the physical or optical properties of the Silicon
to facilitate its use in different embodiments. The benefit of a
semiconductor layer is that it enhances the reflectivity with less
absorption compared to a metal. Another benefit of many
semiconductor materials is that they have a relatively low band
gap. This equates to an appreciable amount of absorption at the UV
and blue-to-green wavelengths and high transmittance in the
amber/red parts of the spectrum is needed for sensors and the like.
The preferential absorption of one or more bands of light lends the
coating to have relatively pure transmitted color. The high
transmitted color purity equates to having certain portions of the
visible or near infrared spectra with transmittance values greater
than 1.5 times the transmittance of the lower transmitting regions.
More preferably the transmittance in the high transmitting region
of a multi-band transflective peripheral ring will be more than 2
times the transmittance in the low transmitting region of a
multi-band transflective peripheral ring and most preferably more
than 4 times the transmittance in the low transmitting region.
Alternately or in addition, the transmitted color of a
transflective band of a multi-band peripheral ring should have a C*
value greater than about 8, preferably greater than about 12 and
most prefer ably greater than about 16. Other semiconductor
materials that result in transflective coatings with relatively
high purity transmitted color include SiGe, InSb, InP, InGa,
InAlAs, InAl, InGaAs, HgTe, Ge, GaSb, AlSb, GaAs and AlGaAs. Other
semiconductor materials that would be viable would be those that
have a band gap energy at or below about 3.5 eV. In an application
where stealthy characteristics are desired and a red signal is used
then a material such as Ge or an SiGe mixture may be preferred. Ge
has a smaller band gap compared to Si and this resulting in
relatively low transmittance levels within greater wavelength
range, which facilitates the "hiding" of any features behind the
mirror. If a uniform transmittance is needed then it would be
advantageous to select a semiconductor material that has a
relatively high band gap.
[0343] FIG. 28A shows an example where a portion C of a two-band
peripheral ring is transflective, while another portion includes
the above-described bands A and B. Optionally, the portion of the
ring outside of portion C may consist of a single band A, produced
with the desired aesthetics for a given application. The
transflective portion C may cover a part or the entire peripheral
ring as needed for a given application. In FIG. 28B, the
transflective portion C is relatively small and a sensor 8710 is
placed behind it. The sealing element (not shown) may be positioned
in the portion C such that it does not block the light from
reaching the sensor or, optionally, the seal may be formed by using
a clear seal. The transitions between the opaque zone A and the
transflective zone C may be formed using means taught in
"multi-zone mirror" so that there is no discernable line or
interface between the two zones. Some examples of transflective
thin-film stacks for use with corresponding opaque zone are listed
in Table 7. Examples A through I in Table 7 all include a specific
embodiment of a transflective surface II perimeter ring stack.
Examples A, B, C and G also include an opaque equivalent. In each
case, the stack is identified as being on surface II with the glass
substrate listed as the first entry. Each subsequent entry
represents a layer applied to surface 2 subsequent to the layer
listed above it. The opaque versions are designed to match the
color and reflectance of the transflective perimeter ring stack as
closely as is reasonable for embodiments where it is desirable for
only a portion of the perimeter ring to be transflective with the
remainder being essentially opaque. The thickness of each layer is
shown in nanometers. The transmittance (%), reflectance (%) and
color (a*, b*) are also given for each example. In each case other
than A, the transition between the transflective stack and the
opaque stack can be abrupt, which will yield a reasonably stealthy
transition, or the transition can be graded to yield a very
stealthy transition. Example A would likely require a graded
transition in order to appear stealthy. Both approaches are taught
in detail in U.S. 2009/0207513. FIG. 28C shows the reflectance and
transmittance of example H. The spectra show low transmittance in
the UV portion of the solar spectrum and a relatively high
transmittance in the visible spectrum. Preferably the UV
transmittance is less than about 15% of the visible transmittance,
preferably less than about 10% of the visible transmittance and
most preferably less than about 5% of the visible
transmittance.
TABLE-US-00008 TABLE 7 Examples of surface 2 transflective thin
film stacks, some with matching opaque equivalents. Transflective:
Opaque: Example Layer nm % T % R a* b* Layer nm % T % R a* b* A
Glass 5.1 64.9 0.4 4.8 Glass 0.8 73.2 -0.4 1.8 Al90/Si10 23.5
Al90/Si10 40.0 ITO 145.0 ITO 145.0 B Glass 6.5 46.2 -1.8 -3.8 Glass
0.7 57.1 -1.3 -2.5 Cr 14.0 Cr 35.0 ITO 145.0 ITO 145.0 C Glass 5.5
52.8 -1.1 0.3 Glass 0.5 63.7 -1.0 2.7 Brass 10.0 Brass 10.0 Cr 13.0
Cr 35.0 ITO 145.0 ITO 145.0 D Glass 10.1 34.0 4.5 -4.6 Ti 35.0 ITO
145.0 E Glass 8.2 40.9 4.2 0.2 Brass 5.0 Ti 35.0 ITO 145.0 F Glass
8.8 64.9 2.2 2.5 7X 25.0 Ru 5.0 ITO 145.0 G Glass 21.5 65.4 0.4 3.1
Glass 2.0 65.7 0.7 0.0 ITO 72.7 ITO 72.7 7X 14.0 7X 14.0 Ni 0.0 Ni
30.0 7X 9.3 7X 9.3 H Glass 12.9 56.2 -5.7 -0.1 ITO 115 Cr 5 Ru 5 Si
115 I Glass 31.4 66.2 -1.7 0.6 TiO2 54.5 SiO2 91.4 TiO2 54.5 SiO2
91.4 TiO2 54.5 ITO 72.1
[0344] In another embodiment of a peripheral ring, as shown in FIG.
29A, a transflective portion C of a two-band (A and C) peripheral
ring may include indicia or icons 8810. The indicia may be
invisible under normal conditions and only become observable when
needed. In other embodiments it may be preferable to have the
indicia visible under normal conditions. In yet another embodiment,
the indicia may become observable via voice activation, proximity
sensors or other sensing means. In the embodiment where the ring is
transflective (see FIGS. 29B and 29C, for example), the openings
8812 for indicia or icons 8810 may be formed in a relatively opaque
coating 8814 located behind a transflective coating 8816 on one of
the surfaces of a corresponding substrate 8820. Alternatively, see
FIG. 29D, the openings 8812 for indicia or icons may be present on
a separate masking element 8824 located behind the transflective
coating 8816 of the peripheral ring and only become visible when
the light unit 8830 of the rearview assembly is activated.
Optimization of Thin-Film Stacks for Low-Reflectance (Dark)
Peripheral Ring.
[0345] The basic block of a thin-film structure (Glass/relatively
thick metallic layer 1/dielectric or TCO layer/thin metallic layer
2) for constructing a band of a peripheral ring with desired
color/reflectance properties has been discussed above. Reduction of
the reflectance figure for a think-film stack of a peripheral ring
can be achieved by adding a TCO or dielectric layer under the
metallic layer 1, thereby creating a four-layer stack. In the
following Tables 8, 9, 10, the additional TCO layer is denoted as
"base ITO", the metallic layer 1 is denoted as "#1 Cr", the
following dielectric or TCO layer--as "middle ITO", and the upper
metallic layer 2--as "top chrome". While the following examples
present embodiments of a low-reflectance peripheral ring that
employ particular materials (ITO and Chrome), it is understood that
these are non-limiting examples and that the use of TCO materials
and metals in general for configuring a band of such peripheral
ring is within the scope of the present application.
[0346] The goal in creating samples 1 through 3 was to form
peripheral-ring thin-film coatings having a different
low-reflectance values while maintaining a neutral color in
reflection. The goal in creating the remaining samples 4 through 7
was to maintain a low level (of about 10 percent) reflectance while
varying the reflected color. Since the optical constants of a thin
metallic film often deviate from those of a bulk metal, the
transmittance value of the metallic layer 1 is provided for
reference. Designs of samples 8-15 demonstrate that a low-level
reflectance of the peripheral ring (about 7.5 percent) can be
attained while varying the color of light reflected off the ring to
the FOV in front of the rearview assembly. Maintaining the
thickness of the top metallic layer 2 (for example, as shown, at
66%) facilitates minimization of transmittance of the peripheral
ring, thereby preserving its operation as a ring concealing the
seal/plug of the EC element from exposure to incident ambient
light. Reduction of the thickness of the metallic layer 2 ("top
chrome") increases the transmittance of the thin-film stack 9 from
essentially zero up to 1.8%), as shown in Table 10.
TABLE-US-00009 TABLE 8 Model Results Middle Top #1 chrome
Experimental Results Sample #Base ITO #1 Cr ITO Chrome
transmittance Reflectance a* b* Reflectance a* b* 1 67 5.4 59 66
30.0 4.7 -0.3 -0.1 4.2 0.5 -2.6 2 56 11.5 50 66 13.4 10.2 2.3 0.0
13 0.4 2.1 3 155 7.6 71 66 22.0 15.0 0.0 0.0 15.1 -4.5 2.4 4 102
7.2 60 66 22.9 10.0 0.0 -15.0 10.3 -3.8 -14.5 5 138 6.6 51 66 25.0
11.2 0.6 15.0 9.5 -3.6 9.4 6 81 3.0 69 66 45.6 10.0 15.0 -15.0 12.6
11.7 -7.9 7 140 4.0 37 66 38.0 10.6 14.0 14.0 9.3 20.3 -1.9
TABLE-US-00010 TABLE 9 Middle Top #1 chrome Sample # Base ITO #1 Cr
ITO Chrome transmittance Reflectance a* b* 8 82 3.7 62 66 40.0 7.5
7.5 0.0 9 91 3.9 56 66 38.5 7.5 6.1 6.0 10 88 4.6 53 66 34.1 7.5
0.0 7.5 11 74 4.4 51 66 35.1 7.5 -4.4 6.9 12 76 5.4 47 66 29.9 7.5
-4.8 0.1 13 77 6.9 47 66 23.9 7.5 -4.1 -6.7 14 64 9.5 47 66 16.9
7.5 0.8 -7.8 15 56 9.3 66 66 17.4 7.5 6.6 -7.7
TABLE-US-00011 TABLE 10 Middle Top Sample # Base ITO #1 Cr ITO
Chrome Transmittance Reflectance a* b* 25 166 19.6 142 66 0.02 40.0
14.7 14.9 26 166 19.6 142 40 0.19 40.2 15.0 14.9 27 166 19.6 142 25
0.73 40.6 14.3 14.9 28 166 19.6 142 15 1.8 40.0 12.2 13.7
TABLE-US-00012 TABLE 10A Base Middle Top Sample # ITO #1 Cr ITO
Chrome Reflectance a* b* 16 149 13.5 10 66 40.0 1.1 15.8 17 166
19.6 142 66 40.0 14.7 14.9 18 174 27.4 139 66 40.0 15.0 0.0 19 186
38.0 123.8 66 40.0 10.7 -10.0 20 200 47.6 117.2 66 40.0 0.0 -13.2
21 120 14 95 66 40.0 -15 -15.4 22 157.9 11.4 102.7 66 40.0 -15.3
0.8 23 123 19.0 50 66 40.0 -9.9 14.5 24 40 36.0 87 66 40.0 -1.4
1.3
[0347] Table 10A summarizes thin-film stacks for use in an
embodiment of the peripheral ring that ensures reflection of
ambient incident daylight light with efficiency of 40%
(corresponding the common mirror standards employed in automotive
industry) but with different colors. Here, the thickness of the
first chrome layer was increased over the preferred ranges
established for the low-reflectance peripheral ring examples
discussed above.
[0348] In another embodiment, a low-reflectance band of a
peripheral ring (which will appear dark to the observe during
normal exploitation of the rearview assembly). In a specific
implementation, a layer of Chromium employed in the peripheral ring
can be doped with oxygen and nitrogen, for example during reactive
sputtering of Cr with air. For better stoichiometry of the
resulting deposited layer, both O.sub.2 and N.sub.2 can be
introduced as reactive gases under independent control to enable
ratios other than the native O.sub.2/N.sub.2 ratio of air
(.about.78% N.sub.2, .about.21% O.sub.2). Experimentally-derived
data showing a portion of the range of reflectance and colors
(glass side) available by reactively sputtering Cr with air is
shown in Table 11. Experimentally derived data showing a portion of
the range of reflectance and colors (glass side) available
reactively sputtering Cr with O.sub.2 and N.sub.2 is shown in Table
12. The sputtered Cr data in Tables 11 and 12 were obtained from a
5.times.22 in.sup.2 Cr target sputtered at 3 kW (DC) at a standoff
distance of .about.3 in and 3 passes at a substrate velocity of 24
inches per minute.
[0349] In another embodiment, a thin layer of Cr (base layer) was
deposited onto the glass substrate, followed by a layer of
air-doped Cr (referred to as "black Cr") was deposited onto the
base layer (50/40 gas ratio, 3 kW, 2 Passes @24 ipm). A bulk layer
of Cr (.about.630 .ANG.) was then deposited onto the black Cr
layer. The glass side reflectance and color of these black Cr
stacks are given in Table 13. The base layer and bulk layer
materials might be substituted with materials other than Cr to
yield the same dark ring effect. Also, the doping of metals other
than Cr may also yield similar dark rings.
TABLE-US-00013 TABLE 11 Cr reactively sputtered with air. Ar/Air
Pressure % Reflectance (sccm) (mTorr) (glass side) a* b* 50/0 2.60
54.5 -1.2 -0.2 50/10 2.65 49.3 -0.6 3.0 50/20 2.70 41.1 0.2 4.9
50/30 2.85 32.2 0.6 6.3 50/40 2.90 23.4 0.3 5.1
TABLE-US-00014 TABLE 12 Cr reactively sputtered with
N.sub.2/O.sub.2 mixtures. Ar N.sub.2 O.sub.2 Pressure % Reflectance
(sccm) (sccm) (sccm) (mTorr) (glass side) a* b* 50 32 8 2.90 26.9 0
3.6 50 32 11 2.92 17.0 -1.1 0.7
TABLE-US-00015 TABLE 13 Multilayer "black Cr" coatings. Ar Air Cr
Base Layer Pressure % Reflectance (sccm) (sccm) (.ANG.) (mTorr)
(glass side) a* b* 50 40 25 2.90 25.2 -0.5 2.8 50 40 12 2.90 21.7
-0.2 4.3 50 40 8 2.90 21.5 -0.4 4.0
[0350] Yet in another embodiment, Cr layer may be doped with
carbon. The doping can be obtained through reactive sputtering in a
similar manner to that described above. Cr can be sputtered with
argon and a carbon source such as acetylene can be introduced as a
reactive gas. The doping of the Cr layer can also be accomplished
through ion-assisted deposition in which case the carbon will be
provided via the ion source. In yet another method, a thin layer of
Cr might be deposited and then implanted with carbon from an ion
source. The thickness of the Cr layer would be limited by the
energy of the implanting ion source due to the relationship between
ion energy and implantation depth. Bulk Cr might then be deposited
onto the carbon implanted Cr layer to make it opaque. As was
described for the O.sub.2/N.sub.2 doped Cr, a thin base layer of
Cr, or another adhesion or optical layer, might be deposited prior
to the carbon doped layer and then that bilayer coating might be
over-coated with an optically dense layer, such as Cr.
Shaping the Peripheral Ring.
[0351] When physical masking is employed during physical vapor
deposition step of EC-element fabrication (such as, for example,
sputtering of a peripheral ring), the deposited material layer is
often caused to be non-uniform and have thickness that decreases
towards the edge of mask, as schematically shown in FIG. 61A due to
shadowing effects of the mask edge. In some peripheral rings this
effect can lead to an observable artifact such as a dark or fuzzy
edge or even a color shift at the edge of the coating attributed to
the thickness change. To remove this unwanted artifact, embodiments
of the present invention employ the combination of physical masking
with laser ablation. Physical masking can have the advantage of
speed and simplicity for patterning larger features of an
EC-element. Laser ablation generally uses a laser beam focused into
a very small spot and scanned (rastered) across an element being
ablated. The time required for ablating large features can
negatively impact the cycle time of a fabrication process.
Nevertheless, combining these two methods can be synergistic.
Physically masking off a portion of the area of interest during
deposition can greatly reduce the area that must be later laser
ablated thereby improving cycle time.
[0352] In one embodiment, a band of a peripheral ring of an
EC-element can be fabricated by first employing a physical mask to
create a crudely shaped open area (FIG. 61B) in the central portion
of the substrate element, and then refining the crude shape of the
formed peripheral ring with laser ablation to yield the peripheral
ring shaped according to the design and having sharp edges (FIG.
61C, 61D). One advantage of this approach is that the
roughly-shaped thin-film pattern (FIG. 61B) formed by physical
masking can be designed in such a way that several different
finely-shaped patterns (similar to that shown in FIG. 61D) can be
obtained by laser ablation of the rough shape. This allows to
reduce the number of physical masks that have to be machined in
order produce several different final peripheral ring shapes.
Another advantage of the combined manufacturing approach is that
the visual edge quality of the chrome ring may be improved by the
laser ablation finishing of the edges. In a specific embodiment,
the outer circumference of the peripheral ring of FIG. 61D can be
formed by laser ablation or by cutting of the substrate. In another
embodiment, the rough mask might be an under-sized copy of the
intended final shape so that the laser ablation step of
manufacturing process serves only to remove a small amount of
material in order to clean the edge of the ring and improve its
appearance.
[0353] The approach of laser ablation of the unwanted portion of
the thin-film coating to yield the intended shape is easily applied
to an EC-element a peripheral ring of which includes a "metal under
TCO" combination. Here, the TCO is deposited onto the substrate
before the metallic layer of the peripheral ring. Laser ablation of
the metallic layer of the peripheral ring with the use of a typical
marking laser is likely to partially remove or damage the TCO
layer. Such damage may adversely impact the performance of the
EC-element. In this instance, the use of a specialized, pico-second
pulsed laser is preferable. It was shown that a Trumpf sourced,
green, pico-second laser is capable of removing the metallic layer
of the peripheral ring without damaging the underlying TCO layer.
The pulsed laser beam was directed through the glass and through
the TCO layer prior to impinging upon the metallic layer. The laser
beam does not interact with the glass or TCO since either is
transparent in the green (.about.500 nm) portion of the optical
spectrum. In addition, energy pulses are delivered to the metallic
coating on a short enough time scale, and there is not enough time
for significant energy to propagate into the layers adjacent to the
layer being ablated before the pulse is over. This enables the
removal of the metallic layer of the peripheral ring from the
surface of the TCO without significant damage to the TCO.
[0354] FIG. 62 shows an SEM image of the edge of a multilayer metal
coating that was removed from the surface of an ITO layer without
damaging the ITO. The ITO in the ablated area was analyzed by
spectroscopic ellipsometry and compared to a control ITO layer that
has not been overcoated with a metallic layer and not subjected to
laser ablation. The refractive index of a TCO material (such as
ITO) relates to the electrical conductivity of the TCO. The
ellipsometry analysis showed the two ITO layers to be equivalent.
Sheet resistance measurements of the two ITO layers were also
equivalent.
[0355] In carrying out the ablation of a metallic coating on a
glass substrate, it was observed that the results were dependent on
whether the laser beam was delivered to the coating directly or
through the glass substrate. In the former case, there usually
remained metal residue on the glass which, in the case of an actual
EC-element, can lead to optical absorption and/or scattering. In
the latter case, however, the ablated surface was significantly
cleaner with no visible residue by optical microscopy. (Under these
conditions, however, some damage to the surface of the glass could
be produced on a size scale observable under optical microscopy and
visible to the eye as subtle haze. Optimization of the laser power,
frequency and motion velocity enabled minimization of the surface
damage to the glass.)
Adaptability of the Perimeter Portion of the EC-Based Mirror
Element to Glare Reduction
[0356] The problem of glare, arising when driving at night, is well
recognized in the field of vehicular rearview assemblies. This
problem has been substantially addressed with respect to the
portion of the assembly, the optical properties of which are
controllable and where an EC-element is caused to reduce its
effective reflectance value, perceivable from the front, in
response to a signal from the glare sensor. However, a peripheral
region of the EC-element-based mirror that is associated with a
peripheral ring of the EC element is passive and, therefore, not
operable to change its optical characteristics. As a result,
industry and related art give no credence to and are practically
silent about attempting to use the passive peripheral (perimeter)
portion of the EC-element-based mirror element in addressing the
problem of glare. We have discovered, however, that optimization of
response of the EC-element-based rearview mirror assembly to
lighting conditions over the whole clear aperture of the EC-element
can be achieved by specifically configuring the peripheral ring of
the EC-element. According to embodiments of the invention, the
glared caused by light reflection from the perimeter portion of the
EC-element-based vehicular mirror is optimized by configuring the
thin-film stack of the peripheral ring such as to achieve a
compromise in optical characteristics of the peripheral ring under
both the photopic and scotopic lighting conditions.
[0357] Photopic vision is generally understood as human vision in
daylight, well-lit conditions (luminance levels of about 1 to about
10.sup.6 cd/m.sup.2), that is defined primarily by on the function
of the retinal cone receptor cells. In comparison, scotopic vision
is vision in low illumination occurring at luminance levels of
about 10.sup.-2 to about 10.sup.-6 cd/m.sup.2 and defined primarily
by the function of the retinal rod receptor cells. The photopic
visual response curve has a peak at about 55 nm or so, while the
scotopic visual response curve is spectrally shifted, with respect
to the photopic curve, towards the shorter wavelengths by about 50
nm. Human vision in transitional, intermediate lighting conditions
is known as mesopic vision and is effectively a combination of
scotopic and photopic vision. Visual acuity and color
discrimination of the human vision under mesopic illumination
conditions is known to be rather inaccurate. Typical scotopic and
photopic spectral responses of a human eye are well known and are
not discussed in this application.
[0358] Owing, in part, to temporal asymmetry of the rate of
accommodation of the eye to changing illumination conditions, a
glare-reduction benefit that a particular passive reflector is
thought to provide under low-illumination conditions can be
substantially nullified by the change of illumination when the
headlights of the following car strike the rearview mirror. While
counterintuitive and surprising, this effect is rather
straightforward to rationalize. Indeed, accommodation of the eye to
change of lighting conditions is asymmetric: it takes minutes to
transition from high to low levels of illumination, while
accommodation in reverse takes significantly shorter time. If a
passive reflector (such as, for example, the annular peripheral
ring corresponding to the perimeter portion of the EC-element) is
designed to assure low levels of reflectance (i.e., a reduced
glare) under low illumination conditions (i.e., as perceived by an
eye that has adapted to scotopic vision), the abrupt change of the
eye's vision from scotopic to photopic may result in perceiving the
levels of light reflectance from the passive reflector as being
excessively high, thus actually worsening the perceived glare in
comparison with that for which the reflector has been designed. In
other words, the passive reflector designed to ensure low
reflectance levels as perceived by the scotopically-adjusted eye,
may produce prohibitively excessive reflectance as perceived by an
eye in a photopic mode. It is appreciated that such effect also
depends, in part, on the spectral content of incident light and,
therefore, depends on the type of the light source used in the
headlights of a vehicle producing the glare in the rearview mirror
at hand.
[0359] Table 13A summarizes the integrated reflectance values (Y)
describing the optical performance of the thin-film coating samples
listed in Table 10A for the two modes of vision, photopic and
scotopic, and under illumination produced by different light
sources. The design of every listed coating sample was optimized to
achieve a 40% reflectance value under illumination typical for
daylight conditions (D65 standard illuminant) as perceived by a
10-degree observer. The plurality of light sources considered
includes, in addition to the D65 standard illuminant, the standard
illuminant A (corresponding to incandescent headlights), the HID
light source (standard high-intensity discharge headlights), and
standard LED headlights. Because spectral contents of light
produced by these light sources differ, the corresponding
integrated reflectance values vary as well. The presented averaged,
over the types of light sources, reflectance values attend to the
fact that under actual driving conditions the driver is likely to
be exposed to light from every type of the headlights. FIGS. 64A
and 64B show how the averaged reflectance levels vary as a function
of color of the reflected light (expressed in CIELAB terms of L*,
a*, and b*) and, in reference to FIGS. 64A, 64B, conclusions about
the optimal structure of the EC-element based vehicular rearview
reflector can be made.
TABLE-US-00016 TABLE 13A Headlight Effects Photopic 10 Degree
Scotopic Photopic Scotopic Sample # D65 A HID LED D65 A HID LED
Average* Average* 16 40.0 41.7 41.6 41.1 34.5 36.6 36.2 34.9 41.5
35.9 17 40.0 43.7 42.5 41.4 31.1 32.9 33.0 32.5 42.5 32.8 18 40.0
42.3 41.1 40.5 36.0 36.0 36.4 37.1 41.3 36.5 19 40.0 40.6 39.7 39.6
41.6 39.9 40.5 41.7 40.0 40.7 20 40.0 38.5 38.0 38.5 46.2 43.9 49.0
45.4 38.3 46.1 21 40.0 35.5 36.4 37.5 51.0 48.0 48.0 49.0 36.5 48.3
22 40.0 37.5 38.3 38.9 44.5 44.3 43.9 43.0 38.2 43.7 23 40.0 39.7
40.1 40.0 38.3 39.8 39.0 37.8 39.9 38.9 24 40 39.9 39.9 39.9 40.2
40.2 40.1 40 39.9 40.1 *No Daylight (D65) Conditions factored into
Average
[0360] For example, during the scotopic illumination conditions
(after the dusk and during nigh-time), the EC-part of the rearview
mirror quickly reduces its reflectance in response to the bright
headlights and prevents the driver's eye from shifting its
sensitivity to the photopic mode. The low levels of reflectance
(between approximately 35% and 60%, preferably between 35% and 55%,
and more preferably between 35% and 50%) that are required to
result from the operation of the rearview mirror as a whole (i.e.,
a combination of the scotopically-optimized peripheral ring and the
EC-element) in low illumination conditions dictate, in reference to
FIG. 64B, such a structure of the scotopically-optimized peripheral
ring that ensures the color of reflected light to have a*>0 and
b*>0. In a specific embodiment, the scotopically-optimized
peripheral ring should be configured to ensure that reflected light
has a* and b* value that lie above the line a*=-b* on the color-map
of FIG. 64B.
[0361] On the other hand, and in further reference to FIGS. 64A and
64B, during the operation under high-level illumination (bright day
light), the peripheral ring the structure of which is optimized for
scotopic vision will produce higher levels of reflection than the
peripheral ring the structure of which is optimized for photopic
vision. In a photopic-vision environment, therefore, it is
preferred to configure the rearview assembly such as to equip the
EC-element with a peripheral ring reflecting the incident light at
the specific levels of reflectance listed above and with the
spectral content described by the negative values of a* and b*. In
a specific embodiment, the EC-element-based rearview assembly
optimized for operation under daylight conditions should have a
peripheral ring that, in reflection, produces light the spectral
characteristics of which correspond to the portion of the color-map
of FIG. 64A that lies below the line a*=-b*.
[0362] A practical design of the peripheral ring thin-film coating,
from the glare reduction point of view, should ensure, therefore,
that the reflectance of the peripheral ring portion of the
EC-element-based mirror perceived by either the scotopically- or
photopically-adapted eyes remains within the specified limits. FIG.
65 shows preferred color characteristics of light reflected by such
practical thin-film structure. It is preferred that the thin-film
structure of the peripheral ring is configured to reflect light
with efficiencies of (between approximately 35% and 60%, preferably
between 35% and 55%, and more preferably between 35% and 50%) and
color described by a* and b* values corresponding to the portion of
the color-map of FIG. 65 defined between the limits a*=-b*+15 and
a*=-b*-15.
Optimization of Choice of Materials for Reflectance
Enhancement.
[0363] Earlier in this application described was a means of
increasing the reflectance of a portion of the peripheral ring with
the use of high reflectance (HR) metallic layers by disposing them
directly on a TCO, dielectric or another other layer, directly on
glass substrate, or an optional adhesion-enhancement layer that may
be present on the glass surface. The high reflectance metals
appropriate for such a purpose are defined based on their bulk
reflectance properties and, to a large extent, their intrinsic
color. Preferably the high reflectance metal should have a neutral
color so that ambient light reflected from the resulting peripheral
ring substantially matches in color the light reflected from the
central portion of the mirror element. Table 14 below illustrates
the reflectance values characterizing various metallic 3 nm-thick
layers deposited on and viewed through the glass substrate and
comparisons of these reflectance values and color of reflected
ambient light with that of the glass substrate itself.
TABLE-US-00017 TABLE 14 Delta Delta Delta Material Reflectance a*
b* R a* b* glass 7.9 -0.2 -0.6 3 nm cobalt 5.8 -0.1 0.0 -2.2 0.1
0.6 3 nm chrome 6.3 -2.0 -2.3 -1.7 -1.8 -1.7 3 nm iridium 6.7 -0.9
0.7 -1.3 -0.8 1.2 3 nm Mo 5.4 -2.9 -1.2 -2.6 -2.7 -0.7 3 nm Ag with
7% Au 11.0 1.3 4.1 3.1 1.5 4.6 3 nm Au 7.8 0.8 9.2 -0.2 0.9 9.8 3
nm Cd 8.5 -0.5 -0.4 0.5 -0.3 0.2 Cu 3 nm 6.9 5.1 3.7 -1.1 5.3 4.3
3n 5050 SnCu 6.7 -0.1 0.6 -1.2 0.0 1.2 3 nm 5050 CuZn 7.5 1.0 4.7
-0.4 1.2 5.3 3 nm Nb 4.2 -0.1 -1.3 -3.7 0.1 -0.7 3 nm Pd 6.5 0.3
0.6 -1.4 0.5 1.1 3 nm Ru 10.5 0.4 -0.1 2.5 0.6 0.4 3 nm Pt 5.5 0.2
0.5 -2.4 0.3 1.0 3 nm Rhenium 5.8 -1.5 -4.7 -2.2 -1.3 -4.1 3 nm Rh
7.7 0.7 0.3 -0.3 0.9 0.9 3 nm Ta 5.1 -0.2 -0.2 -2.9 0.0 0.4 3 nm Ag
10.3 1.2 3.7 2.4 1.4 4.3 3 nm Al 19.9 0.2 3.5 11.9 0.4 4.0
[0364] Table 15 illustrates values of real and imaginary parts of
the refractive indices at 550 nm for various metals.
TABLE-US-00018 TABLE 15 Metal n @550 nm K @550 nm Ag 0.136 3.485
AgAu7x 0.141 3.714 Al 0.833 6.033 Al:Si 60:40 3.134 4.485 Al:Si
90:10 1.244 4.938 Al:Ti 50:50 2.542 2.957 Al:ti 70:30 2.885 3.392
Au 0.359 2.691 Cd 1.041 4.062 Co 2.053 3.826 Cr 2.956 4.281 Cu
0.958 2.577 CuSn 1.871 4.133 CuZn 0.587 2.854 Ge 3.950 1.975 Ir
2.229 4.314 Mo 3.777 3.521 Nb 2.929 2.871 Ne 1.772 3.252 Pd 1.650
3.847 Pt 2.131 3.715 Re 4.253 3.057 Rh 2.079 4.542 Ru 3.288 5.458
Ta 3.544 3.487 Ti 1.887 2.608 V 3.680 3.019 W 3.654 3.711 Zn 1.117
4.311 Zr 1.820 0.953
[0365] It is known by one skilled in the art that refractive index
of a given metal and dispersion of refractive index are dependent
on the process and deposition parameters used to produce the
coating and that a deposition processes can be optimized to
slightly modify optical constants of a particular metal. The
difference between material properties of thin metallic films as
compared to bulk (or thick film) metals has limited the use of
metals, at least in applications related to automotive rearview
mirror assemblies, to substantially thick metallic layers where the
optical properties are more predictable and consistent with the
"bulk"-metal behavior. The data of Table 14 suggest that,
generally, metals would not be optimal materials for increasing the
reflectance of other metals or, if such a possibility exists, then
at least the increase in reflectance may not be accompanied with a
neutrality of color. As a result, the use of thin metallic film for
reflectance-enhancement of multi-layer stacks has been
substantially limited.
[0366] The following describes an attempt to formulate a
generalized approach of determining which metals can be reliably
used for enhancing the reflectance of a simple structure comprising
a chosen metallic material (referred to hereinafter as a base
metal) carried by a thick glass superstrate that acts as incident
medium. In particular, such reflectance-enhancing (RE) metallic
layers are considered to be disposed on a second surface of the
thick glass superstrate and the base metal. The change in
reflectance is being considered in light incident onto the metallic
layers through the glass superstrate and reflected back to the
first surface. The generalized approach is determined based on
considering the relationships, between the real and imaginary parts
of refractive indices for several base metals and several 3 nm
thick RE-metallic layers, that allow for increase in reflectance at
issue. The D65 Illuminant and 10 degree observer color standards
were used for all calculations.
Example 1
[0367] Environmentally stable and low-cost Chromium is used as the
base metal. A thin film program was used to calculate the resultant
color and reflectance of light for the different 3 nm-thick
RE-metallic layers. The results are summarized in Table 16.
TABLE-US-00019 TABLE 16 Structure Reflectance a* b* Reference
(Glass + 52.3 -1.9 -0.7 chrome base layer) Reference + RE-layer
made of . . . cobalt 54.3 -1.6 0.5 chrome 52.3 -1.9 -0.7 iridium
54.8 -1.8 0.6 Mo 50.1 -1.4 1.5 Ag with 7% Au 57.4 -1.7 -0.3 Au 54.7
-2.1 2.1 Cd 56.7 -1.7 -0.6 Cu 54.4 -1.3 0.3 SnCu 5050 55.2 -1.7 0.2
CuZn 5050 55.0 -1.7 0.9 Nb 50.9 -1.4 1.4 Pd 55.2 -1.6 0.3 Ru 54.9
-1.6 0.2 Pt 53.9 -1.6 0.8 Rhenium 47.6 -1.2 4.3 Rh 55.7 -1.4 0.4 Ta
50.2 -1.6 2.1 Ag 56.9 -1.7 -0.2 Al 62.2 -1.5 -0.9 Al:Si 60:40 53.2
-1.6 0.3 Al:Si 90:10 58.3 -1.7 -0.3 Al:Ti 50:50 51.8 -1.7 0.9 Al:Ti
70:30 51.7 -1.6 1.3 Ge 47.4 -1.9 -1.1 Ni 53.8 -1.7 0.8 Ti 52.7 -1.8
0.4 W 49.2 -1.7 3.1 V 49.4 -0.7 0.8 Zn 56.7 -3.1 -1.1 Zr 51.7 -1.9
-0.7
[0368] FIG. 30A graphically shows a corresponding change in
reflectance of the considered structures of Table 16 with n (real
part of the index of the RE-metal, x-axis) and k (imaginary part of
the index of RE-metal, y-axis). The dots on the graph represent the
reflectance values for the different RE-metals. The contour lines
represent contours of iso-reflectance. The dashed line represents a
contour approximately describing the reference structure of Table
16. The use of metals having n and k values falling to the right of
the dashed reference line as RE-metals leads to decrease of the
reflectance value of the structure, while the use of metals with n
and k values falling to the left of the dashed reference line leads
to the overall increase in reflectance. Based on the dashed
reference iso-contour, the condition on RE-metals assuring the
increase in reflectance of the reference structure of Table 16 is
k-1.33n.gtoreq.0.33. It is understood that when a metal satisfying
the above equation is used as a RE-layer added to the reference
structure, the increase of the RE-layer thickness above 3 nm will
only further increase the overall reflectance. Generally,
therefore, the thickness of the RE-metallic layer should be greater
than about 1 nm, preferably greater than about 3 nm, more
preferably greater than about 5 nm and most preferably greater than
about 10 nm. As noted above there may be other layers between the
reflectance enhancement layer and the substrate.
[0369] Similarly, two additional examples have been considered:
Example 2 with CuSn alloy (50:50) as the base metal, and Example 3
with Ta as the base metal. Table 17 and FIG. 30B present results
for Example 3, while Table 18 and FIG. 30C summarize the results
for Example 4.
TABLE-US-00020 TABLE 17 Structure n k R a* b* Reference (Glass +
1.871 4.133 60.0 -0.4 3.2 CuSn base layer) Reference + RE-layer
made of . . . AgAu7x 0.141 3.714 65.4 -0.4 3.3 Al:Si 90:10 1.244
4.938 64.1 -0.5 2.7 Cr 2.956 4.281 56.2 -0.2 1.5 Ge 3.950 1.975
50.3 0.1 2.3 Ru 3.288 5.458 56.7 -0.6 2.3 Ta 3.544 3.487 52.4 0.2
5.4 Ti 1.887 2.608 58.1 -0.3 4.0 V 3.680 3.019 57.3 0.4 2.5 Zr
1.820 0.953 58.4 -0.4 3.0
TABLE-US-00021 TABLE 18 Structure n k R a* b* Reference (Glass +
3.544 3.487 46.6 0.2 3.7 Ta base metal) Reference + RE-layer made
of . . . AgAu7x 0.141 3.714 51.9 0.1 4.0 Al:Si 90:10 1.244 4.938
53.6 -0.1 3.1 Cr 2.956 4.281 49.2 -0.3 1.9 CuSn 1.871 4.133 50.6
0.0 3.4 Ge 3.950 1.975 42.9 0.1 1.0 Ru 3.288 5.458 51.3 -0.2 2.1 Ti
1.887 2.608 47.7 0.2 3.6 V 3.680 3.019 47.6 0.4 2.2 Zr 1.820 0.953
46.3 0.1 3.2
[0370] The reflectance iso-contour for Example 2 in FIG. 30B is at
60% reflectance and is described by the equation k=3.919*n-3.6129.
The higher reflectance is attained when the following condition is
met: k-3.919*n.gtoreq.-3.6129. The reflectance iso-contour for
Example 3 in FIG. 30C is at 46.6%. The equation for this contour is
estimated to be k=0.8452*n+0.1176. The condition for enhanced
reflectance is k-0.8453*n.gtoreq.0.1176.
[0371] Further, values of slopes of the above three linear
dependences and values of k corresponding to n=0 (the intercept of
the y-axis) were plotted against values of n to obtain FIGS. 31A
and 31B, where discreet results are fitted linearly (FIGS. 31A and
31B) and quadratically (FIG. 31B). The obtained fits are as
follows: slope=7.362-1.911*n; linearly fit intercept=2.413*n-7.784
and the quadratically fit intercept=-23.7+15.23*n-2.401*n.sup.2.
Based on these generalized fits, the estimate of the coefficients
of the equation necessary to define the optical constants for the
RE-metals can be performed.
[0372] The appropriate materials for reflectance enhancement taught
above are defined for systems with a relatively high refractive
index superstrate. Float glass or plastic, for instance, have a
relatively high refractive index relative to air. That is why the
thin metals, as taught above, act as anti-reflection layers when in
contact with, and viewed through, a high index superstrate. A
similar behavior occurs with other superstrate materials such as
Electrochromic fluid or gel. The EC fluid or gel has a high
refractive index relative to air and that is why the reflectance of
an EC element is substantially lower than the reflectance of the
mirror metalized glass. A mirror system described herein,
comprising a first lite of glass with a first and second surface, a
transparent electrode arranged on the second surface such as ITO, a
second lite of glass with a third and fourth surface, a reflective
metal system comprising a first layer of chrome on the third
surface and a second layer of ruthenium on the chrome layer with a
perimeter seal that forms a chamber between the two lites of glass.
The chrome/ruthenium coated glass has a reflectance of about 70%
when measured with air as a superstrate and about 57% in the EC
configuration. Much of the reflectance drop is due to the high
refractive index of the EC fluid being in contact with the
ruthenium layer.
[0373] Various metals have been taught in the art that exhibit high
reflectance and are electrochemically stable in an Electrochromic
device. For instance, silver alloys, such as silver gold, or other
noble metals such as platinum or palladium have been described in
the Electrochromic art. There have been a limited number of viable
metals taught in the art due to the combined requirement of high
reflectance and electrochemical stability. For instance, as taught
in U.S. Pat. No. 6,700,692, the metals must have a sufficient
electrochemical potential to function satisfactorily as an anode or
cathode in a fluid based electrochemical device. Only noble metals,
Au, Pt, Rh, Ru, Pd have demonstrated sufficient reflectivity and
electrochemical stability. The prior art references that alloys may
be viable but no methods are described that can be used determine
which alloys may be viable from a reflectance perspective. The
formula described above can be used to target the viable noble
metals alloys that will increase the reflectance of a base metal in
an electrochromic device. The structure of the coatings on the
2.sup.nd lite of glass would be glass/base metal/reflectance
enhancement noble metal alloy/viewer. The formula taught above
demonstrates a way to select improved metal alloys that include
noble metals that are suitable for Electrochromic devices.
[0374] The previous teaching around the use of noble metals in
Electrochromic devices relies on the combination of electrochemical
stability and high reflectivity that the noble metals possess.
Other metals, other than aluminum, haven't been proposed because
they do not have sufficient reflectivity and electrochemical
stability. Aluminum has been proposed, but has not been realized
practically as a third surface electrode because it does not have
sufficient electrochemical stability in a fluid based EC device.
Other metals or alloys have not been employed in Electrochromic
devices because it is believed that they do not have the necessary
reflectivity and electrochemical stability. The discovery described
above, where a metal with a newly defined refractive index
characteristic can increase the reflectance of a base metal,
enables a new class of metals, alloys and materials to be
considered for use in Electrochromic mirrors and devices. The REM
should increase the reflectance of the base metal by at least 2
percentage points, i.e., 50 to 52%, preferably increase the
reflectance by about 5%, more preferably by about 7.5% and most
preferably by greater than about 10%.
[0375] The refractive index characteristic is insufficient because
there is no correlation between this characteristic and the
electrochemical potential characteristics. If the REM is doped or
alloyed with a noble metal it would fall within the improvements
for the noble metal alloys defined above. The REM may be employed
in a thin film stack in an intermediate location by the application
of a capping layer with sufficient electrochemical properties. The
capping layer may be a noble metal, or alloy of a noble metal or
may be a transparent conduction oxide such as ITO, IZO or the like
described elsewhere in this application. The capping layer, if it
does not have a refractive index as defined with our new equation
will reduce the reflectance of the REM. This has obvious
disadvantages and therefore the capping layer must be relatively
thin otherwise there will be no reflectance increase attained from
the REM. The capping layer, if it does not meet the criteria for
reflectance enhancement, will decrease the reflectance to a greater
degree in an opposite manner to which the refractive index will
increase the reflectance. Therefore, layers with large real parts
of the refractive index and low parts of the imaginary refractive
index will decrease the reflectance the greatest. Obviously, as
taught above the relative change in the reflectance is a function
of the relative refractive indices between the two metals. The
amount of change for a given thickness of film (such as 3 nm, for
example) can be estimated from the newly developed formulae.
Preferably, a capping layer with noble characteristics should
reduce the reflectance by less than 5%, more preferably less than
2.5% and most preferably less than 1.5%. The thickness of the
capping metal layer with noble characteristics necessary to
maintain these reflectance changes will vary with the refractive
index properties of the REM but should be less than about 4 nm,
preferably less than about 3 nm and most preferably less than about
2 nm. A TCO-based capping layer may meet the reflectance
requirements at up to a 30 nm thickness.
Silver Alloys for Corrosion Resistance
[0376] High reflectivity of silver makes this material particularly
useful for mirrors and EC-mirrors. Specifically, in applications
where a central portion of the mirror inside the peripheral ring
has reflectance values greater than 60%, more preferably greater
than 70% and most preferably greater than about 80%, and where
matching of the ring's reflectance value to that of the central
portion of the mirror is required, it is advantageous to use
high-reflectance Ag-based materials for in a thin-film stack of the
peripheral ring instead of Chrome and noble metals. Generally, the
quality requirements for a peripheral ring are more stringent than
those for a 3.sup.rd surface reflector because all portions of the
peripheral ring are visible to the user while portions of the
3.sup.rd surface reflector next to electrical buss connections are
hidden from the view and, therefore, allow for minor metal
degradation and corrosion. Therefore, not only must the seal and
electrical connections adjoining the peripheral ring be maintained
in environmental tests but the visual appearance of the
peripheral-ring coating must be maintained. Silver has limited
corrosion resistance and electrochemical stability that in the past
limited its use as a 3rd surface reflector electrode in EC-mirror
systems. Later, dopants and stabilizing layers have been proposed
and commercialized that were claimed to increase both the
resistance of silver to CASS testing (from a chemical durability
perspective) and its electrochemical stability (from a device
electrical cycling perspective). For example, a commonly-assigned
U.S. Pat. No. 6,700,692 generally taught that platinum-group metals
(such as, for example, Pt and Pd along with Au) were the preferred
dopants for Ag, and that noble metals (such as, for example, Ru, Rh
and Mo) were preferred materials for stabilization layers. No
specific examples were offered by the related art, however, that
pertain specifically to the dopants alone and their effect on
chemical or environmental durability of Ag. Prior art simply
implied that addition of the platinum-group metals to the silver
layer provides the electrochemical stability while the use of
stabilization layers below (and/or above) the silver provide the
CASS resistance.
[0377] We discovered non-obvious solutions that allow for
substantial improvement of the durability of Ag and Ag-alloys
through the use of alternate dopants and without the use of
stabilization layers. The basic structure of an underlying
embodiment included Glass/ITO (125 nm)/silver or silver alloy (50
nm)/ITO (15 nm). Fully assembled EC-elements were run through the
CASS testing and steam testing, while epoxy-sealed EC-cells without
EC-medium were subjected to blow tests. Testing conditions were as
follows: CASS testing was performed according to recognized
industrial standards. In the steam tests the parts are held in an
autoclave at approximately 13 psi and 120 C in a steam environment
and checked once a day until failure. In the case of CASS two
failure modes are noted--coating degradation and seal integrity. In
the case of the steam tests, only seal failure is reported. In the
blow test, a hole is drilled in a part, the part is gradually
pressurized until failure occurs, and the pressure at failure is
noted. A number of failure modes are possible in the Blow test but
in this example, adhesion of the coating materials to the glass,
adhesion of the coating materials to each other and adhesion of the
coating materials to the epoxy are the failure modes of most
interest.
[0378] Table 19 shows the CASS, Steam and Blow results, obtained
with multiple samples, for pure silver and different silver alloys.
The average values are presented for the Steam and Blow tests,
while results of the CASS tests are expressed in days to failure.
It is believed that ability of a material to survive approximately
2 days without coating damage (in CASS test) is sufficient for most
vehicle interior applications. All CASS tests were stopped at 17
days or 400 hours, which corresponds to a relatively long exterior
vehicle test. Depending on the application the CASS requirement may
vary between these two extrema. The pure silver has the worst
performance in the steam test, relatively poor CASS results, and
relatively poor adhesion in the blow tests that demonstrated
substantial intra-coating delamination. Samples made with the
traditional dopants, Pd, Pt and Au, are also shown in Table 19.
Improvements are demonstrated for the steam and blow tests relative
to the pure silver but the CASS results are still not adequate.
Similarly, the AgIn alloy has improved properties in Steam and Blow
but the CASS results are improved but not adequate for all
applications.
[0379] Silver alloys known as Optisil.TM. (supplied by APM Inc,)
were also evaluated. Three versions, 592, 595 and 598 were tested.
The compositions are shown below in Table 20. Each version
demonstrates substantial improvement relative to the pure silver
with the Optisil 598 showing the best performance. The Optisil 598
has some coating lift in the blow tests but percentage of coating
lift was very small and this also corresponded with the highest
average blow value. Therefore, even though some lift is present,
the results do not show significant failure mode for this material.
The Optisil materials are viable for interior vehicle applications
and some are viable for external applications also. A number of
sterling silver alloys were tested. The specific compositions,
based on analysis of the sputtering targets, are shown in Table 16.
These particular alloys show substantial improvement over the pure
silver. The Sterling "88" and 51140 alloys had the best performance
of the group with the 51308 and Argentium having lesser
performance. In the Optisil family, the lower levels of Cu and Zn
provide better CASS resistance. For the Argentium, the copper and
germanium additions help improve the CASS resistance. The
"Sterling" samples benefited from the addition of copper (all),
zinc and Si (88 and 51308) and Sn (51308).
TABLE-US-00022 TABLE 19 Days to Failure (Results are for all parts
in test unless noted) Steam Steam CASS CASS Day-To- % Coating Blow
Material Coating Seal Fail lift PSI Ag99.99% 1 (1 part ok 1 (1 part
ok 4.3 30 31.2.sup.# to day 12) to day 12) Optisil 592 5.5 (2 part
15 20.5 0.8 32.4 average) (2 parts ok to day 17) Opti 595 17 17
20.2 15.8 30.1 Optisil 598 17 17 24.3 0.83 41.5.sup.# 83Ag/17In 1
6.25 19.7 0 37.0 Ag94/Pt6 1 1 18.7 4.2 35.2.sup.# Ag96/Pd3 1 1 12.2
86.7 39.4.sup.# Argentium 1 (2 part 5.5 (2 part 27.3 0 38.1.sup.#
sterling average) average) (2 parts ok (2 parts ok to day 17) to
day 17) Sterling 17 9 (2 part 21.3 0 28.5 "88" average) (2 parts ok
to day 17) Sterling 7 (1 part) 7 (1 part) 23.7 0 32.1 51140* (3
parts ok (3 parts ok to day 17) to day 17) Sterling 8 8 20.7 8.3
34.6 51308 Ag93/Au7 1 1.33 13.3 25.8 29.2.sup.# Ag16Au 2 2 18.3
22.5 30.2 Ag76/Au24 1 1.33 11.3 95.8 40.5 *These parts had some
suspended data in steam tests, therefore actual average is higher
than reported values .sup.#These part had some intra-coating
adhesion failures
Silver Alloy Compositions
TABLE-US-00023 [0380] TABLE 20 Name Ag Cu Ge Zn Sn Si Au In
Argentium 91.73 6.879 1.329 Sterling 51308 92.76 2.775 4.194 0.1097
0.0894 0.0153 Sterling 51140 92.18 7.779 Sterling 88 92.49 5.5403
1.8833 0.0422 Optisil 598 98.24 1.134 0.4805 0.088 Optisil 595
95.04 2.761 1.892 0.0573 0.2066 Optisil 592 92.95 4.767 2.064
0.1183 0.0577 Ag/In 82.82 0.0124 0.0056 0.0114 17.13
[0381] Degradation of a material usually occurs in multiple ways,
and there are often multiple possible protection pathways and the
different elements doped into or alloyed with the silver can act to
stabilize the metal thus improving its performance. The different
silver alloys may contain one or more elements that act on one or
more of the protection pathways to stabilize the silver. Silver
often degrades by migration into a lower energy state. The silver
atoms are 100 times more mobile along the boundary of an Ag-grain
than within the bulk of the grain. Therefore, addition of an
element migrating to the Ag-grain boundary and inhibiting the
mobility of the silver is expected act to improve the durability of
Ag. Metals such as Ti and Al are often corrosion resistant because
they oxidize and the surface oxide seals the metal preventing
further reactions. In the case of silver, elements may be added to
the metal that act to protect the silver from the corrosive or
degradation of environmental stressors. In other cases an element
may be added that forms an alloy with the silver that alters the
chemical or environmental activity of the silver. The Sterling
silver alloys described above may, in part, contribute to this
stabilization method. Still other methods to stabilize the silver
include the use of an interface treatment as taught in Our Prior
Applications, where sulfur or other element is embedded into the
surface of a coating or substrate prior to the deposition of the
silver or silver alloy. Out Prior Applications also taught the
deposition of silver or a silver alloy onto a ZnO or other surface
that puts the deposited material into a low energy state, thereby
improving its environmental durability. The silver layer may also
be protected by the application of metal or non-metal (oxide,
nitrides, etc) either above or below the silver layer.
Additionally, the silver or silver alloy may be protected by being
overcoated with a relatively thick oxide layer such as ITO. It is
recognized that variation of deposition conditions such as target
shielding angles, target to substrate distance, composition of
residual background gasses, speed of layer growth, e.g., may
produce somewhat varying results. Nonetheless, the trend of
improvement of various characteristics for noted materials noted is
expected to hold over a range of parameters, particularly those
typical for magnetron sputtering.
[0382] Specific materials that may be added to the silver that
enable one or more of the stabilization mechanisms described above
include: Al, Zn, Cu, Sn, Si, Ge, Mn, Mg, W, Sb, B, Cr, Th, Ta, Li,
and In. These can be used either alone or in combination to enable
good CASS performance, adequate Steam lifetime and good adhesion of
the silver layer. Preferably, the CASS resistance should be greater
than about 2 days, preferably greater than 5 days, more preferably
greater than 10 days and most preferably greater than 17 days. The
steam lifetime should be greater than 10 days, preferably greater
than 15 days, and more preferably greater than 20 days. The coating
stack should maintain adherence to glass, epoxy and within itself
during adhesion tests. The blow test described above demonstrates
relative performance among a set of samples but the test is
dependent on mirror shape, pressure ramp rate, edge treatment and
epoxy type as well as coating performance.
Galvanic Corrosion
[0383] While the problem of galvanic corrosion of thin-films of the
EC element in a rearview assembly arises due to exposure of an edge
of the EC-element to electrolytes (such as salt laden solutions
from road-spray, for example, or CASS solution), related art does
not seem to address or even acknowledge this problem. For example,
an exemplary thin-film stack such as a stack of the third-surface
transflective electrode, deposited on a glass substrate and
comprising Cr, Ru, Ag, and TCO layers may form a galvanic series,
thereby facilitating degradation of the electrode from the edge of
the EC-element inwards and causing not only the change in
appearance of the EC-element based mirror but also a breach of
EC-cell. In an embodiment of the present invention, protection of
the EC-element thin-film stack against corrosion includes the use
of a so-called "sacrificial anode" co-located with (either
adjacently or adjoiningly) with the thin-film stack at the edge of
the EC-element. Experiments were conducted to determine the extent
of protection provided by the sacrificial anode element to a
third-surface thin-film stack including a 35 nm thick Cr layer, a 3
nm thick Ru layer, a silver-gold alloy (7% Au) of about 25 nm, and
an ITO of about 15 nm. A portion of a bus clip (containing either a
single section or "tooth" or multiple sections/"teeth", thus having
various lengths as described in Table 21) constructed of a
copper-cobalt-beryllium alloy (alloy C17410, Be 0.15-0.5; Co
0.35-0.6; Cu balance) was used as a sacrificial anode element at
attached to the edge of the EC element in contact with the
thin-films stack. In reference to FIG. 63 and Table 21, the lower
portion of the EC-element was exposed to an electrolyte (CASS
solution), while a chosen sacrificial anode element(s) were placed
at location(s) labeled with numerals (1 through 9) along the lower
edge of the element (for samples in Group 1) or along the upper
edge of the element (for samples in Group 2). The zones of the
lower portion of the EC-element, in which effects of galvanic
corrosion of the lack thereof were subsequently observed, are
labeled with letters (A through J).
[0384] Samples of Group 1 were held in the CASS chamber for only 24
hours. The parts were inspected after the 24 hour period was
complete. Samples 1 to 3 had no bus clips present and had extensive
corrosion damage within the 24 exposure. There were failures in
most of the zones A to J. Samples 4 to 6 had full continuous clips
present between positions 1 to 9. One part had a failure in Zone A
while the other two samples did not fail during the 24 hour
exposure. Samples 7 to 9 had individual bus clips present at
positions 1 to 9. These parts only had failures in zones A and J.
The zones between the individual clips were protected by the
proximity of the individual clips. This implies that at the 0.5''
distance away from the clips the coating is protected. The failures
in Zones A and J show that at up to a distance of 1.25'' the clips
provide galvanic corrosion protection.
[0385] Group 2 had two groups, those that had failures within 24
hours and those kept in the chamber for another 24 hours for a
total exposure of 48 hours. Various locations for the clips were
tried in this series of experiments. In each case the coating was
protected between individual clips spaced at 1'' separations. For
the other variants the protection distance varied from between
1/2'' up to 4''. In practice, the necessary distance between the
sacrificial anode and the coating to be protected will vary with
the specific geometry of the full mirror assembly but as this test
shows additional protection is attained when the distance between
them is relatively small.
TABLE-US-00024 TABLE 21 Distance of Sample Degradation to ID
Configuration Result by zone Sacrificial Anode Group 1 24 Hour
inspection 1 No buss bar or individual teeth failure in most zones
N/A no clips 2 No buss bar or individual teeth failure in most
zones N/A no clips 3 No buss bar or individual teeth failure in
most zones N/A no clips 4 Continous serrated buss bar points 1-9
Failure in zone A. 7/8'' 5 Continous serrated buss bar points 1-9
No Failure 6 Continous serrated buss bar points 1-9 No Failure 7
Individual clips at points 1-9 Failure in zone J 11/4'' 8
Individual clips at points 1-9 Failure in zone J 1'' 9 Individual
clips at points 1-9 Failure in zone A 3/4'' Group 2 24 hour
inspection (parts listed under 48 hour inspection had no breach at
24 hours) 10 Continuous serrated buss bar from points 5-9 Failure
in zones D and E 5/8'' 11 Individual clips at points 4-9 Failure in
zones C and D 7/8'' 12 Individual clips at points 1-6 Failure in
zone J 4'' 13 Continuous serrated buss bar from mid 3 and 4 to mid
6 and 7 Failure in zones A, B and J 21/2'' 14 Individual clips at
points 4-9 Failure in zone A 33/4'' 15 Individual clips at points
1-7 Failure in zone J 25/8'' 16 Individual clips at points 1-7
Failure in zone J 21/2'' 17 Continuous serrated buss bar from
points 1-5 Failure in zones G and H 13/4'' 18 Individual clips at
points 2-9 Failure in zone A 15/8'' 19 Individual clips at points
1-3 and7-9 Failure in zones A, D, E, F 1/2'' 20 Continuous serrated
buss bar from mid 3 and 4 to 6 Failure in zones A, B, C, D and J
11/2'' 21 Individual clips at points 1-6 Failure in zone J 33/4''
48 hour inspection 22 Individual clips at points 2-9 None N/A 23
Individual clips at points 1-8 None N/A 24 Individual clips at
points 1-3 and7-9 D, E, F, G 11/8'' 25 Individual clips at points
3-9 Failure in zones A, J 11/2'' 26 Individual clips at points 3-9
Failure in zones A, B, C, J 1'' 27 Continuous serrated buss bar
from points 5-9 Failure in zones D, E 7/8'' 28 Continuous serrated
buss bar from points 1-5 Failure in zones F, G, J 1/2'' 29
Individual clips at points 1-8 Failure in Zone A 5/8''
Aluminum Alloys for Corrosion Resistance
[0386] As noted in other parts of this specification, aluminum has
a high reflectance and, for that reason, is also of interest for
fabrication of a peripheral ring. Though the use of this material
in peripheral rings is known, no means of improving its chemical
and environmental durability has been proposed. We discovered a
variety of alloys of aluminum and dopants that improve the
stability of aluminum in EC-element environment. Elements such as
magnesium, manganese, silicon, copper, ruthenium, titanium, copper,
iron, oxygen, nitrogen or palladium either alone or in combination
with other elements in this group will improve the stability of the
aluminum. Other elements may be present in the aluminum without
deviating from the spirit of this invention. The amounts of these
elements required for improvement of aluminum qualities may be
between 50 and 0.1 weight-%, preferably between 40 and 0.5
weight-%, more preferably between about 25 and 0.5 weight-%, and
most preferably between about 10 and 0.5 weight-%.
[0387] Table 22 shows the performance of different Al-based
materials in the CASS test either as single layers or in stacks.
The stack consists of 120 nm ITO/5 nm chrome/Al-based material/35
nm chrome/5 nm ruthenium. This stack is particularly well suited
for a perimeter ring. The ITO provides the electrical conductivity
for the EC-cell, the 5 nm chrome layer provided adhesion of
different metals to the ITO, the Al-based material provides
relatively high reflectance for the system, the 35 nm chrome
provides opacity, and the 5 nm ruthenium provides good electrical
conductivity and stability to a Ag-paste type electrical buss of
the EC-element. The aluminum-based materials may be spatially
uniform in composition or the composition may be graded across a
part. A graded part is one in which the composition gradually
changes from one composition to another composition across the
part. The graded parts are produced in a combinatorial fashion
using two three-inch sputter cathodes angled toward each other. The
angle of the cathodes, the relative power and the composition of
the targets mounted to each cathode can be varied to alter the
composition across the substrate. The relative composition of the
coating at different locations can be estimated using analytical
techniques or from calibration experiments.
[0388] As shown in Table 22, the pure aluminum coating is degraded
in less than a day in CASS testing. We discovered that stability of
aluminum coatings varies with the thickness of the aluminum layer.
In particular, the lifetime in CASS decreases as the thickness of
the layer increases. A very thin layer, approximately 50 angstroms,
has significantly superior stability lasting up to 17 days in CASS.
We also unexpectedly discovered that Al deposited at high grazing
angles in the combinatorial deposition system also had unexpectedly
high stability, which can possibly be explained by the fact that a
thin metallic layer incorporates more of the background gas into
its matrix during deposition and the trace oxygen or water present
during deposition is partially oxidizes the aluminum, thereby
leading to the improved CASS stability. For improved stability, the
oxygen content in the aluminum film should be below about 20%,
preferably below about 10%, more preferably less than about 5%, and
most preferably less than about 2.5%. The lower oxygen content has
the added benefit of having a lesser impact on the optical
properties of the aluminum. Alternatively, the crystal structure of
the aluminum may vary with thickness. In this case the physical
thickness of the layers themselves, rather than oxygen content is
the mechanism leading to improved stability. The aluminum layer
should be less than about 70 angstroms, preferably less than about
55 angstroms and most preferably less than about 40 angstroms. The
reflectance of a stack may be tailored to a specific level by
depositing a breaker layer in between multiple silver layers such
as Al/SiO.sub.2/Al/SiO.sub.2/Al. The breaker layer should be
relatively thin to avoid thin film interference colors, i.e., less
than about 500 angstroms, preferably less than 250 angstroms and
most preferably less than about 100 angstroms.
[0389] We also discovered that Al:Si compound, where the Si-content
varies from about 40% to 10%, performs substantially better than
the pure aluminum. The higher Si level of about 40% has CASS
performance that is independent of thickness, while the lower Si
content material (at about 10% level) demonstrates the CASS
stability versus thickness of the layer similar to that of the pure
aluminum.
[0390] Aluminum-titanium compounds were also evaluated. Titanium
contents between about 50% and 25% show substantially improved CASS
stability. Ruthenium added to AlTi or other aluminum compounds also
substantially improved the performance even at very small levels.
This additive, along with Pd, is expected to lead to improved CASS
results in various aluminum-based materials.
TABLE-US-00025 TABLE 22 Metal Metal Thickness CASS Stack Details
(angstroms) Performance ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru Al 140 <1 day
ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru AlTi 70:30 ~150-200 14 days ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru
AlTi 50:50 ~150-200 14 days ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru AlTi 75:25 ~150-200
14 days ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru Al 94 <1 day ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru Al 70
<1 day ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru Al 56 2 days ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru Al 47
very light damage up to 21 days ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru Al 40 very light
damage up to 21 days ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru Al:Si 60:40 140 >21 days
ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru Al:Si 60:41 105 >21 days ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru
Al:Si 60:42 84 >21 days ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru Al:Si 60:43 70 >21
days ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru Al:Si 60:44 60 >21 days
ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru AlTiRu ~150-200 >17 ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru AlTiRu
90:8:2 ~150-200 >17
[0391] Optical properties of aluminum may be affected by added
elements. Table 23 shows the refractive index of some of the
aluminum-based materials. These values may be used in conjunction
with the reflectance-enhancement-metal (REM) formula described
above to determine the arrangements wherein these materials can be
used to increase the reflectance of Al-based film.
TABLE-US-00026 TABLE 23 Material N K Al60/Si40 3.13 4.49 Al90/Si10
1.24 4.94 Ti50/Al50 2.54 2.96 Ti30/Al70 2.88 3.39
Other Materials Viable as REM with CASS Resistance
[0392] Copper alloys of Zinc and tin, known as brass and bronze,
respectively, have good optical properties and function well as REM
layers for a wide range of base metals and, depending on the
composition, can have good CASS resistance. Navel brass, with a
60:40 Cu:Zn ratio and other trace elements, lasted up to 7 days in
CASS while Cu:Sn at a 50:50 ratio also survived up to 7 days in
CASS (both in a ITO/Cr/Metal/Cr/Ru stack described above for Al. It
is expected that select alloys and compound of copper, alloyed with
other elements will be suitable for use as REM layers. The
homogeneous peripheral ring embodiments described herein are often
preferred to match the reflectivity and color of the main mirror
reflector. The color tolerancing described elsewhere in this
document may be preferred in some applications. Additives to make
brass more corrosion resistant include iron, aluminium, silicon
nickel, tin and manganese. In certain applications, where a single
phase is present in the brass, phosphorus, arsenic or antimony in
levels of less than 0.1% can provide further stability. In some
embodiments, having a zinc content of less than 15% may also
provide benefits. Brasses known commonly as "Admiralty" or "Navel"
brass may be particularly stable in corrosive environments. Bismuth
bronze, a copper/zinc alloy with a composition of 52 parts copper,
30 part nickel, 12 parts zinc, 5 parts lead, and 1 part bismuth is
quite stable. It is able to hold a good polish and so is sometimes
used in light reflectors and mirrors. Additives to make copper-tin
bronzes more corrosion resistant include phosphorus, zinc,
aluminum, iron, lead, and nickel.
[0393] The homogeneous ring embodiments described herein are often
preferred to match the reflectivity and color of the main mirror
reflector. The color tolerancing described elsewhere in this
document may be preferred in some applications.
Universal Thin Film Stacks.
[0394] The durable silver- and aluminum-based alloys are
particularly useful as so-called universal materials. Depending on
the requirements of a particular application, the reflectivity and
color of the peripheral ring may vary. As more reflectivity levels
of the ring are requested by the users, manufacturing of peripheral
rings becomes challenging if multiple metals are needed to attain
the desired reflectivity properties. If, for instance, different
embodiments or applications require 35%, 45%, 55%, 65%, 75% or 85%
reflectance, then up to 6 different materials could be used to
attain the desired color match. It is often easier to lower the
reflectance of a high reflectance metal rather than raise the
reflectance of a lower reflectance metal. Therefore, in certain
manufacturing scenarios a range of reflectance values can be
obtained with a high reflectance metal by either reducing the
thickness of the metal and optionally backing the layer with a low
transmittance metal when opacity is needed. The REM formula
described above can be used to assist selecting appropriate metal
combinations. Another way to lower the reflectance of a high
reflectance metal is to put a lower reflectance metal in front of
it (relative to the viewer). The thickness of the lower reflectance
metal can be increased to decrease the reflectance of the high
reflectance metal. The silver and aluminum alloys described herein
are particularly good in that they have excellent environmental
durability, adhesion and high reflectance. Therefore, in a
production environment, a number of commercial products may be
produced simply by adjusting the thickness of a single layer. This
leads to a particularly simple process for manufacturing thus
reducing capital cost, development time and product durability.
[0395] For example, silver and silver alloys and aluminum alloys
are particularly reflective. A stack consisting of these material
maybe quite reflective. Table 24 shows the calculated reflectance
of stacks using a silver gold alloy with 7% gold as the principle
reflector layer while Table 25 shows the calculated reflectance of
stacks using an aluminum silicon alloy with 10% silicon. The stack
have additional layers present. A thin ITO layer is present next to
the glass based on the assumption that an adhesion layer may be
needed while a layer of ruthenium and chrome are added on top of
the reflected layer to guarantee an opaque coating. These layers
may be present or not depending on the needs of a given
application. Examples 1 to 7 show the impact of altering the silver
alloy on reflectance. By changing the thickness the reflectance may
be altered without sacrificing transmittance properties. In
examples 8 to 13 a thin layer of ruthenium is placed between the
ITO and the silver alloy wherein the ruthenium acts to minimize the
reflectance. In either of these ways a single stack can be used for
a variety of applications by simply adjusting the thickness of one
layer.
[0396] A similar behavior is shown with aluminum as the principle
reflector metal in Table 25 In examples 14 to 19 the thickness of
the aluminum alloy is altered to modify the reflectance. Examples
20 to 24 show the effect of adding a thin ruthenium layer between
the viewer and the aluminum alloy. In this embodiment, as in the
embodiment above with silver, the reflectance may be attenuated
with the adjustment of only a single layer.
[0397] The novelty of these designs is their ability to adjust the
appearance with a simple one layer adjustment. In practice, one or
more layers may be adjusted as needed to attain the desired optical
effects. The table shows a particular effect for a specific stack.
In practice alternate metals may be used as defined elsewhere in
this document.
TABLE-US-00027 TABLE 24 Sample # ITO Ru AgAu7x Ru Cr Y a* b* 1 10 0
60 4.5 50 92.3 -0.6 2.4 2 10 0 40 4.5 50 90.4 -0.6 2.6 3 10 0 20
4.5 50 81.0 -0.8 2.9 4 10 0 15 4.5 50 75.9 -0.9 2.9 5 10 0 10 4.5
50 69.2 -1.1 2.7 6 10 0 5 4.5 50 61.5 -1.3 2.2 7 10 0 0 4.5 50 53.6
-1.6 1.5 8 10 1 60 4.5 50 79.5 -0.5 5.1 9 10 2 60 4.5 50 70.4 -0.4
6.2 10 10 2.5 60 4.5 50 67.0 -0.5 6.4 11 10 3 60 4.5 50 64.1 -0.5
6.4 12 10 4 60 4.5 50 59.8 -0.6 6.1 13 10 5 60 4.5 50 56.9 -0.7
5.5
TABLE-US-00028 TABLE 25 Sample # ITO Ru AlSi (90:10) Ru Cr Y a* b*
14 10 0 60 4.5 50 73.43 -0.77 2.64 15 10 0 40 4.5 50 73.46 -0.77
2.63 16 10 0 20 4.5 50 72.01 -0.89 2.41 17 10 0 15 4.5 50 70.32
-0.98 2.24 18 10 0 10 4.5 50 67.19 -1.11 2.02 19 10 0 5 4.5 50
61.84 -1.29 1.75 20 10 1 60 4.5 50 69.41 -0.77 2.95 21 10 2 60 4.5
50 66.24 -0.79 3.03 22 10 3 60 4.5 50 63.76 -0.82 2.97 23 10 4 60
4.5 50 61.84 -0.85 2.84 24 10 5 60 4.5 50 60.39 -0.88 2.66
Electrochromic Medium.
[0398] Preferably the chamber contains an electrochromic medium.
Electrochromic medium is preferably capable of selectively
attenuating light traveling therethrough and preferably has at
least one solution-phase electrochromic material and preferably at
least one additional electroactive material that may be
solution-phase, surface-confined, or one that plates out onto a
surface. However, the presently preferred media are solution-phase
redox electrochromics, such as those disclosed in commonly assigned
U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,902,108, 5,128,799, 5,278,693, 5,280,380,
5,282,077, 5,294,376, 5,336,448, 5,808,778 and 6,020,987; the
entire disclosures of which are incorporated herein in their
entireties by reference. If a solution-phase electrochromic medium
is utilized, it may be inserted into the chamber through a sealable
fill port through well-known techniques, such as vacuum backfilling
and the like.
[0399] Electrochromic medium preferably includes electrochromic
anodic and cathodic materials that can be grouped into the
following categories:
[0400] (i) Single layer--the electrochromic medium is a single
layer of material which may include small inhomogeneous regions and
includes solution-phase devices where a material is contained in
solution in the ionically conducting electrolyte and remains in
solution in the electrolyte when electrochemically oxidized or
reduced. U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,193,912; 6,188,505; 6,262,832; 6,129,507;
6,392,783; and 6,249,369 disclose anodic and cathodic materials
that may be used in a single layer electrochromic medium, the
entire disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
Solution-phase electroactive materials may be contained in the
continuous solution phase of a cross-linked polymer matrix in
accordance with the teachings of U.S. Pat. No. 5,928,572 or
International Patent Application No. PCT/US98/05570 entitled
"ELECTROCHROMIC POLYMERIC SOLID FILMS, MANUFACTURING ELECTROCHROMIC
DEVICES USING SUCH SOLID FILMS, AND PROCESSES FOR MAKING SUCH SOLID
FILMS AND DEVICES," the entire disclosures of which are
incorporated herein by reference.
[0401] At least three electroactive materials, at least two of
which are electrochromic, can be combined to give a pre-selected
color as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,020,987 the entire disclosure
of which is incorporated herein by reference. This ability to
select the color of the electrochromic medium is particularly
advantageous when designing information displays with associated
elements.
[0402] The anodic and cathodic materials can be combined or linked
by a bridging unit as described in International Application No.
PCT/WO97/EP498 entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC SYSTEM," the entire
disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. It is also
possible to link anodic materials or cathodic materials by similar
methods. The concepts described in these applications can further
be combined to yield a variety of electrochromic materials that are
linked.
[0403] Additionally, a single layer medium includes the medium
where the anodic and cathodic materials can be incorporated into
the polymer matrix as described in International Application No.
PCT/WO98/EP3862 entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC POLYMER SYSTEM," U.S. Pat.
No. 6,002,511, or International Patent Application No.
PCT/US98/05570 entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC POLYMERIC SOLID FILMS,
MANUFACTURING ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES USING SUCH SOLID FILMS, AND
PROCESSES FOR MAKING SUCH SOLID FILMS AND DEVICES," the entire
disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
[0404] Also included is a medium where one or more materials in the
medium undergoes a change in phase during the operation of the
device, for example, a deposition system where a material contained
in solution in the ionically conducting electrolyte which forms a
layer, or partial layer on the electronically conducting electrode
when electrochemically oxidized or reduced.
[0405] Multilayer--the medium is made up in layers and includes at
least one material attached directly to an electronically
conducting electrode or confined in close proximity thereto which
remains attached or confined when electrochemically oxidized or
reduced. Examples of this type of electrochromic medium are the
metal oxide films, such as tungsten oxide, iridium oxide, nickel
oxide, and vanadium oxide. A medium, which contains one or more
organic electrochromic layers, such as polythiophene, polyaniline,
or polypyrrole attached to the electrode, would also be considered
a multilayer medium.
[0406] In addition, the electrochromic medium may also contain
other materials, such as light absorbers, light stabilizers,
thermal stabilizers, antioxidants, thickeners, or viscosity
modifiers.
[0407] It may be desirable to incorporate a gel into the
electrochromic device as disclosed in commonly assigned U.S. Pat.
No. 5,940,201, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated
herein by reference.
[0408] In at least one embodiment, a rearview mirror assembly is
provided with an electro-optic element having a substantially
transparent seal. Examples of substantially transparent seals and
methods of forming substantially transparent seals are provided in
U.S. Pat. No. 5,790,298, the entire disclosure of which is included
herein by reference.
[0409] In at least one embodiment, the rearview mirror assembly is
provided with a bezel 6580 for protecting the associated seal from
damaging light rays and to provide an aesthetically pleasing
appearance. Examples of various bezels are disclosed in U.S. Pat.
Nos. 5,448,397, 6,102,546, 6,195,194, 5,923,457, 6,238,898,
6,170,956 and 6,471,362, the disclosures of which are incorporated
herein in their entireties by reference.
[0410] It should be understood that the above description and the
accompanying figures are for illustrative purposes and should in no
way be construed as limiting the invention to the particular
embodiments shown and described. The embodiments described herein
can employ, without limitation, any additional features and
elements taught in Our Prior Applications, including thin-film
coating configurations and multi-zone embodiments pertaining to
transflective arrangements of the EC-element based or prismatic
element based mirror system such as those taught in U.S. patent
application Ser. No. 12/370,909; and including mirror systems and
rearview assemblies with anisotropic polymer laminates such as
those taught in U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 12/496,620,
12/629,757, and 12/774,721. The appending claims shall be construed
to include all equivalents within the scope of the doctrine of
equivalents and applicable patent laws and rules.
* * * * *
References